JP5831568B2 - Game machine - Google Patents

Description

  The present invention relates to a gaming machine such as a slot machine.

  As a gaming machine that stops after rotating a plurality of reels, for example, there is a slot machine. In the slot machine, a plurality of symbols are given to the outer peripheral portion of each reel, and a part of the symbols given to each reel is visible through the display window. Then, when the player inserts a medal and operates the start lever, the lottery of the winning combination is performed inside the slot machine and each reel starts to rotate. After each reel starts rotating, the stop switch is operated. As a result, the reels are sequentially stopped and one game is completed. At this time, if each reel wins a winning lottery, for example, it is determined from the timing at which the stop switch is operated so that the winning symbol corresponding to the winning combination can stop on a preset active line. Stop control such as stopping after rotating the number of symbols is performed. Then, when all reels stop rotating, winning is established when the winning symbol of each reel is stopped on the active line, a predetermined number of medals are paid out, or the gaming state becomes a special gaming state advantageous to the player. The privilege to transfer is granted. Therefore, it is common for a player to watch a changing symbol and operate a stop switch so that the predetermined symbol stops on the active line. In other words, the player can actively participate in the game. This is a feature of slot machines.

Such slot machines include a slot machine that performs so-called table control as the stop control. The slot machine that performs table control has a stop table that can derive the relationship between the symbol that has reached the effective line when the stop switch is operated and the symbol that is actually stopped on the effective line. , For each winning role. Then, a stop table corresponding to the lottery result is selected, and stop control of each reel is performed based on the selected stop table (see, for example, Patent Document 1).

JP 2004-313447 A

Therefore, the amount of data required for reel stop control becomes enormous.

The present invention has been made in view of the above illustrated situation such, it is an object to provide a gaming machine capable of suppressing an increase in the data amount related to the stop control.

The invention according to claim 1 is a pattern display means having a plurality of circulation display means for cyclically displaying a plurality of kinds of patterns in a specific direction;
A display unit that enables visual recognition of the cyclic display of the pattern in each of the circulation display means;
Start operation means operated to start cyclic display of the pattern in each of the circulation display means;
Lottery means for performing a lottery of a role based on the operation of the start operation means;
Start control means for starting and controlling the picture display means so as to start circulation display in each circulation display means based on the operation of the start operation means;
A plurality of stop operation means operated to individually stop the circulation display in each of the circulation display means;
When the circulation display of the corresponding circulation display means is stopped based on the operation of each of the stop operation means, and when the winning operation lottery is won and the stop operation means is operated at a predetermined timing, A stop control means for stopping and controlling the design display means so that the winning design corresponding to the winning role stops at an effective position visible from the display unit;
A privilege granting means for granting a privilege as a winning establishment when the winning design stops at a valid combination at the effective position;
In a gaming machine equipped with
The stop control means includes
Correspondence relationship storage means for storing a correspondence relationship between a plurality of partition areas that circulate and display the circulation display information that is circularly displayed by each of the circulation display means, and a pattern set in each partition area;
Corresponding to the type of each pattern for which the corresponding relationship is stored in the corresponding relationship storing means in each of the circulation display means, the pattern used for determining whether or not the winning pattern forms the predetermined combination at the effective position. Pattern information storage means for storing information;
A reaching section area grasping means for grasping a reaching section area reaching a predetermined specified position among the respective partition areas of the corresponding circulation display means when the stop operation means is operated and a stop command is generated; ,
When the stop command is generated, stop partition area determination means for determining a stop partition area to be stopped at the specified position among the respective partition areas of the corresponding circulation display means based on the grasping result of the reaching partition area grasping means When,
The stop information for all the partition areas of the circulation display means as stop information used when stopping the circulation display of the circulation display means for which the stop partition area has not been determined, and the circulation display means for which the stop partition area has already been determined Stop information deriving means for deriving based on the determination result of the stop section area determining means;
Stop information storage means for storing the stop information for all the partitioned areas derived by the stop information deriving means;
With
The stop information deriving means includes
Reaching for each partition area constituting the all partition areas, based on information stored in the correspondence storage means, a reaching pattern that reaches the effective position when the partition area reaches the specified position A pattern grasping means;
Using the pattern information corresponding to the reaching pattern on the effective position for the cyclic display means for which the stop section area has already been determined, and the pattern information corresponding to the reaching pattern grasped by the reaching picture grasping means, the effective position Winning possibility determination means for determining whether or not the winning design forms the predetermined combination;
First avoidance determination for determining whether or not the reaching picture establishes a winning corresponding to a combination that is not won in the lottery of the combination, using the pattern information corresponding to the reaching pattern grasped by the reaching pattern grasping means Means,
As the lottery result of the winning combination, the circulation display that is the target for deriving the stopping information in a situation where the winning combination is not won for the predetermined winning combination only when the stopping operation means is stopped at a predetermined timing. A second avoidance determination that determines whether or not a winning result of the predetermined combination is not established when each section area of the means reaches the specified position and a specific stop result corresponding to the winning of the predetermined combination is obtained. Means and
With
The stop information storage means includes at least
A winning possibility storage area for storing winning possibility information indicating a determination result of the winning possibility determination means;
As the first avoidance determination information indicating the determination result of the first avoidance determination means, the avoidance response indicating that the reached pattern corresponds to a combination that establishes a winning corresponding to the winning combination that has not been won in the winning combination. The first avoidance determination information, or the first avoidance determination information that is not an avoidance response indicating that the reached pattern does not correspond to a combination that establishes a winning corresponding to a winning combination that is not won in the winning combination. A first avoidance determination storage area that stores the
A second avoidance determination storage area for storing second avoidance determination information indicating a determination result of the second avoidance determination means;
Is provided,
The stop information deriving means is at least one in which the stop partition area is not determined from when a stop command that causes the two circulation display means to stop is generated as the stop command until the next stop command is generated. The circulation display means performs the grasping by the reaching picture grasping means, the determination by the winning possibility judging means, the judgment by the first avoidance judging means, and the judgment by the second avoidance judging means. Based on that, deriving stop information of all the partition areas,
The stop section area determining means is
When the stop command is issued to the circulation display means from which the stop information of all the partition areas is derived, the circulation display means is based on the grasp result of the reaching section area grasping means and the stop information. Of each partition area, determine a stop partition area to stop at the specified position,
and
Avoiding the partition area in which the first avoidance determination information corresponding to the avoidance is stored in the first avoidance determination storage area without stopping at the specified position;
As the lottery result of the combination, the second avoidance determination information indicating that the second avoidance determination unit determines that it corresponds to causing the specific stop result in a situation where the predetermined combination is not won. As for the partition area stored in the second avoidance determination storage area, the first avoidance determination information that is not the avoidance correspondence is the partition area that can be stopped at the specified position instead of the partition area. When there is a partition area stored in the first avoidance determination storage area, the first avoidance determination information not corresponding to the avoidance is stored in the first avoidance determination memory while avoiding without stopping at the specified position. When there is no partition area stored in the area, it is determined to stop at the specified position,
The stop information deriving means is for deriving the stop information during the stop control of the corresponding picture display means by the stop control means,
The stop control means controls the picture display means to stop so that a corresponding circulation display means stops until a predetermined specified period elapses after the stop command is generated,
The stop information derivation means is for ending the derivation of the stop information during the specified period,
A second stop for deriving stop information of all the divided areas for the prescribed circulation display means among the circulation display means from when each circulation display means starts circulation display until the first stop command is generated. An information deriving unit is provided .

According to the present invention, it is possible to suppress an increase in the amount of data related to stop control .

  According to the present invention, it is possible to diversify the effective lines that are set while avoiding confusion for the player.

The front view of the slot machine in 1st Embodiment. The perspective view of a slot machine. The perspective view of the slot machine which shows the state which opened the front door. The rear view of a front door. The front view of a housing | casing. The assembly perspective view of a left reel. FIG. 3 is a development view of a belt-like belt constituting each reel. Explanatory drawing for demonstrating a main line and a subline. Explanatory drawing which shows the relationship between a winning mode and a medal payout number. The block circuit diagram of a slot machine. Explanatory drawing for demonstrating the structure of ROM. Explanatory drawing for demonstrating the structure of RAM. The flowchart which shows a NMI interruption process. The flowchart which shows a timer interruption process. The flowchart which shows the process at the time of a power failure. The flowchart which shows a main process. The flowchart which shows a winning probability setting process. The flowchart which shows a normal process. The flowchart which shows a reel rotation process. The flowchart which shows a lottery process. The figure which shows an example of a lottery table. The figure which shows an example of a slip table. The flowchart which shows the interruption process for starting. The flowchart which shows a reel stop process. The flowchart which shows a 1st stop process. The flowchart which shows the slip number acquisition process for 1st stop. The flowchart which shows the interruption process for a stop. The flowchart which shows the priority order information creation process for 2nd stop and after. (A) Explanatory drawing for demonstrating the priority order information buffer, (b) Explanatory drawing for demonstrating the determination value calculation information buffer. The flowchart which shows the judgment value calculation information creation process. Explanatory drawing for demonstrating the outline of a judgment value calculation information creation process. The flowchart which shows a lead-in bit information setting process. Explanatory drawing for demonstrating the lead-in bit information search buffer. The flowchart which shows a drawing bit table acquisition process. The figure which shows an example of a drawing-in bit table. The flowchart which shows a winning determination process. The flowchart which shows a winning determination process. The flowchart which shows a line determination process. Explanatory drawing for demonstrating a symbol corresponding table. Explanatory drawing for demonstrating a role corresponding | compatible table. Explanatory drawing for demonstrating a kicking corresponding | compatible table. The flowchart which shows the payout number acquisition process. The flowchart which shows a lead-in bit information search process. Explanatory drawing for demonstrating the outline of a winning determination process. The flowchart which shows a 2nd stop process. The flowchart which shows the number-of-sleeves acquisition process for the 2nd stop and after. Explanatory drawing for demonstrating the outline of the number-of-sleeves acquisition process after a 2nd stop. The flowchart which shows a priority line change process. Explanatory drawing for demonstrating the outline of a priority line change process. The flowchart which shows unfair winning prize determination processing. The flowchart which shows a 3rd stop process. The flowchart which shows the priority order priority information creation process for irregular pushing. Explanatory drawing for demonstrating the outline of the payout number acquisition process at the time of irregular pushing. Explanatory drawing for demonstrating each bit allocated to the buffer for determination value calculation information. Explanatory drawing for demonstrating each bit allocated to the buffer for determination value calculation information. Explanatory drawing for demonstrating each bit allocated to the buffer for determination value calculation information. Explanatory drawing for demonstrating each bit allocated to the buffer for determination value calculation information. The flowchart which shows medal payout processing. The flowchart which shows a bonus game process. The figure which shows an example of a stop appearance when a reach eye is displayed Explanatory drawing for demonstrating the priority information creation process for the 2nd stop after based on a 1st stop command. Explanatory drawing for demonstrating the priority order information creation process for the 2nd stop after based on a 2nd stop command. Explanatory drawing for demonstrating the determination value calculation information buffer in 2nd Embodiment. The flowchart which shows a winning determination process. The flowchart which shows a winning determination process. Explanatory drawing for demonstrating each bit allocated to the buffer for determination value calculation information. Explanatory drawing for demonstrating the stop control of the reel in another symbol arrangement | sequence. Explanatory drawing for demonstrating the stop control of the reel in another symbol arrangement | sequence. Explanatory drawing for demonstrating another structure of a display window.

  First, the invention that can be extracted from the present embodiment will be described while showing effects and the like as necessary.

  First, prior to explanation of effective means and the like, supplementary explanations of terms used in the effective means and the like will be given.

  The “winning possibility information indicating the determination result of the winning possibility determination means” may be “winning possibility information corresponding to the determination result of the winning possibility determination means”. That is, any configuration may be employed as long as the result of the winning possibility determination means is indicated by the winning possibility information. The same applies to the “first winning possibility information” and the “second winning possibility information”.

  The “avoidance determination information indicating the determination result of the avoidance determination unit” may be “avoidance determination information corresponding to the determination result of the avoidance determination unit”. That is, any configuration may be employed as long as the determination result of the avoidance determination unit is indicated by the avoidance determination information. The same applies to “first avoidance determination information” and “second avoidance determination information”.

  The “priority information indicating the derivation result of the priority deriving unit” may be “priority information corresponding to the derivation result of the priority deriving unit”. That is, any configuration may be used as long as the result of the priority deriving means is indicated by the priority information.

  In addition, “priority effective position information indicating that a picture located in the first divided area or the predetermined second divided area stops at the preferential effective position” is “the preferential effective position in the first divided area or the predetermined second divided area”. The priority effective position information corresponding to the stop of the positioned pattern may be used. In other words, any configuration may be employed as long as the priority effective position information indicates that the pattern located in the first partition area or the predetermined second partition area stops at the priority effective position.

  Further, the “numerical information indicating that no privilege is granted” may be “numerical information corresponding to no privilege being given”. That is, any configuration may be used as long as the numerical information indicates that no privilege is granted.

  “Understanding” in the “arrival section area grasping means” includes a configuration in which the rotation position of the circulating body is detected using a detection sensor, and the reaching section area is specified based on the detection result. More specifically, such a configuration is configured to identify that the circulating body has made one turn by detecting passage of a predetermined portion of the circulating body by one detection sensor. And, for example, in a gaming machine that switches a partitioned area that has reached a specified position to the next partitioned area by outputting a predetermined number of pulse signals, the reached partitioned area depends on the detection result of the detection sensor and the output number of pulse signals. The configuration is specified. In addition to this configuration, a configuration in which the rotational position of the circulating body is specified based on the detection results of a plurality of detection sensors is also conceivable.

  In addition, the “understanding” in the “reaching picture grasping means” includes a configuration that refers to information stored in the correspondence storage means.

  Next, effective means for solving the above-described problems will be described while showing effects and the like as necessary. In the following, for easy understanding, the corresponding configuration in the embodiment of the invention is appropriately shown in parentheses, but is not limited to the specific configuration shown in parentheses.

Means 1. A plurality of revolving bodies (reels 42L, 42M, 42R) that circulate in the circumferential direction and are provided with a plurality of types of patterns (designs) in the circumferential direction;
A display window (display windows 31L, 31M, 31R) that makes it possible to visually recognize a part of the patterns for each of the circulating bodies;
Start operation means (start lever 71) operated to start the circulation of each of the circuit bodies;
Lottery means (lottery processing function of the main control device 131) for lottery of the role based on the operation of the start operation means;
Drive means (stepping motors 61L, 61M, 61R) provided for each of the rotating bodies and rotating the respective rotating bodies;
Start driving control means (starting interrupt processing function of the main control device 131) for starting and controlling the driving means so as to start the circulation of the circulating bodies based on the operation of the starting operation means;
A plurality of stop operation means (stop switches 72 to 74) operated to individually stop the circulation of each of the circulating bodies;
Based on the operation of each of the stop operation means, if the corresponding orbiting body is stopped, and if the winning combination lottery is won and the stop operation means is operated at a predetermined timing, the winning combination is won. Stop drive control means (reel stop processing function of the main controller 131) for stopping and controlling each of the drive means so that the winning symbol corresponding to the winning combination stops on the effective line;
In a gaming machine provided with a privilege granting means (such as a medal payout process of the main control device 131) for granting a privilege as winning establishment when the winning pattern of each orbiting body stops on the active line,
The display window is configured such that, when each of the rotating bodies is stopped, at least three pictures attached to the specified rotating body (left reel 42L) are visible.
A combination line that connects the visible positions (the upper, middle, and lower positions of the reels 42L, 42M, and 42R) in a straight line so that the pattern can be visually recognized from the display window when the rotating bodies are stopped. Comprising effective line setting means (effective line setting function of the main controller 131) for setting the effective line as the effective line,
The effective line setting means includes a first specified visually recognizable position (middle stage position) among the specified visually recognizable positions at which a pattern attached to at least the specified circulating body (left reel 42L) among the circulating bodies is visible. ) Is not set as an effective line, and a combination line including the second specified visually recognizable position adjacent to the first specified visually recognizable position can be set as an effective line.

  According to the means 1, the combination line including the first specified visually recognizable position is not set as an effective line among the specified visually recognizable positions at which the pattern attached to at least the specified circulating body is visible among the respective circulating bodies, A combination line including the second specified visually recognizable position adjacent to the first specified visually recognizable position may be set as an effective line. That is, the specified visually recognizable position includes a visually recognizable position set as an effective line and a visually recognizable position not set as an effective line. By adopting such a configuration, it is possible to diversify the effective lines as compared to a conventional gaming machine that has a configuration in which a plurality of effective lines can be set using all the visible positions.

  In addition, a combination line that connects the visible positions where the pattern can be visually recognized from the display window when each circuit is stopped is set as an effective line, so that the player can be sure that the winning has been established. It becomes possible to grasp, and it becomes possible to avoid that a player is confused.

  As a result, it is possible to diversify the effective lines that are set while avoiding confusion for the player.

  Further, when the combination line including the first specified visually recognizable position is not set as an effective line, the number of combination lines for which an effective line can be set as compared to a configuration in which the combination line can also be set as an effective line. Will decrease. However, it is possible to set the combination line including the first specified visually recognizable position and the adjacent second specified visually recognizable position as an effective line, thereby minimizing the decrease in the number of combination lines that can be set as the effective line. It becomes possible to keep it on.

  Mean 2. In the means 1, receiving means for receiving game media (medals, virtual medals) (inserted medal detection sensor 75a and credit insertion detection sensors 77a to 79a confirmation processing function S207 of the main control device 131) and game media from the receiving means. Bet number setting means (medal insertion processing function of the main control device 131) for detecting acceptance and setting the bet number of games with the first number (three) as an upper limit; A gaming machine characterized in that the effective line is set so that both of the second prescribed visually recognizable positions are part of the effective line regardless of the number of bets on the game set by the number setting means.

  According to the means 2, the second specified visually recognizable position adjacent to the first specified visually recognizable position is set as a part of the active line regardless of the number of bets on the game. By adopting such a configuration, it is possible to reduce the frequency of occurrence of so-called miss-outs in which a winning combination is not established even though a winning combination is won in a configuration in which a viewable position that is not set as an active line is provided. Even if the stop operation means corresponding to the prescribed rotating body is operated at a timing at which the winning design can be stopped at the first prescribed visually recognizable position, one of the second prescribed visually recognizable positions is This is because the corresponding drive means can be stopped and driven to stop the winning design.

  Means 3. In the above means 1 or 2, the specified circulating body is a circulating body located at one end of each of the circulating bodies.

  According to the means 3, there is a position that is not set as a part of the effective line in the visually recognizable position where the pattern attached to the circulating body located at one end among the circulating bodies is visible. When a combination line including the first specified visually recognizable position is not set as an effective line, the number of combination lines that can set an effective line is reduced as compared to a configuration in which the combination line can also be set as an effective line. It becomes. However, by making the first specified visually recognizable position a position where the pattern attached to the circulating body located at one end of each circulating body is visible, a decrease in the number of combination lines that can set an effective line is minimized. It becomes possible to keep it on.

  Means 4. In any one of the above means 1 to 3, when a predetermined pattern ("cherry" design) of the specified circuit is stopped on the effective line, a privilege is awarded as a winning establishment regardless of the result of the stop of other circuit A gaming machine characterized by comprising second privilege granting means (medal paying-out processing when the main control device 131 establishes a cherry prize).

  According to the means 4, as a winning mode for establishing a winning pattern, a winning mode in which a pattern of each orbiting body forms a predetermined combination on the effective line and stops (hereinafter referred to as “combined winning mode”), an effective line There is a winning mode (hereinafter referred to as “single winning mode”) in which a predetermined pattern of the prescribed circuit is stopped.

  As described above, in a gaming machine having a single winning mode, when a plurality of active lines are set, a combined winning in which winning of a winning combination for winning a combination and winning winning combination can be generated simultaneously. The occurrence of a composite winning is, for example, when winning a combination that becomes a combination winning mode, and when the winning design of each orbiting body is stopped on a predetermined effective line, the predetermined design is stopped on the other effective line and won It means that not only winning combinations but also winning single winnings that are not won. Since the occurrence of the composite prize will result in a winning that contradicts the winning lottery result, it is necessary to stop each circuit body so as to avoid the occurrence of the composite prize. For this reason, in the conventional gaming machine, there is a case where a missing game occurs as a result of avoiding the composite winning.

  Here, a case where the winning combination based on avoiding the composite winning is won for the combination serving as a combination winning mode, but not winning the combination serving as a single winning mode will be described as an example. In the case where a combined winning is established, the effective lines where winning is established are limited even if a plurality of effective lines are set according to the result of stopping the circulating bodies that have been previously stopped. For this reason, for example, when the stop operation means is operated to stop the specified circuit body last, if the winning design is stopped on the active line where the combined winning is established, the predetermined design may be stopped on another effective line. Will occur. In such a case, since a winning combination that is a single winning mode is not won, stop control is performed to stop the specified circuit body so that the predetermined pattern does not stop on the active line. As a result, the winning pattern of the prescribed circuit body also stops at a position different from the active line where the combination winning is established, and the missing is generated. The same applies to a case where a winning combination that is a single winning mode is won but a winning combination is not selected.

  Since such a spillover causes a disadvantage to the player, it is desirable to reduce the chance of the spillover occurring. However, when a combination winning or single winning is established regardless of the operation timing of the stop operation means, not only does the feature of the slot machine that can actively participate in the game dilute, but also the pattern arrangement of the specified circuit is monotonous. And became concerned about the new problem of games becoming monotonous.

  On the other hand, by applying the characteristic configuration of each of the above means to a gaming machine having a combined winning mode and a single winning mode, it is possible to reduce the chance that the player suffers a disadvantage while avoiding the above concerns. It becomes. Since the combination line including the first specified visually recognizable position is not set as an effective line, if the winning design is stopped on the effective line where the combination prize is established while stopping the predetermined pattern at the first specified visually recognizable position, This is because establishment can be avoided.

  Means 5. In the above means 4, a second predetermined picture that forms a combination of pictures in which the first winning (replay prize) is established when the predetermined picture stops at any of the predetermined visually recognizable positions on the prescribed circuit body. Simultaneously viewable sections (No. 1 to 3, No. 9 to No. 11, No. 10 to No. 12, and No. 11 to No. 13) are formed so that (“Replay” symbol) stops at other specified visually recognizable positions. A gaming machine characterized in that the predetermined patterns are arranged.

  According to the means 5, when the predetermined pattern is stopped at one of the predetermined visually recognizable positions on the predetermined circuit body, the second predetermined pattern that forms the combination of the patterns that will establish the first prize is another predetermined visually recognizable position. Each predetermined pattern is arranged so that a simultaneously visible section that stops at the same time is formed. In gaming machines that can set all the stipulated viewable positions as a part of the active line, for example, winning a role that can establish a single winning while winning a role that can establish a first winning If not, there may be a failure to avoid compound winnings.

  On the other hand, in a gaming machine that does not set a combination line including the first specified visually recognizable position as an effective line, the game includes a specified visually recognizable position where the second predetermined image stops when the predetermined image stops at the first specified visually recognizable position. By setting the combination line as an effective line and stopping the second predetermined pattern on the effective line, it is possible to avoid the occurrence of missing due to the composite winning avoidance. Therefore, it becomes possible to suppress that the design freedom regarding the pattern arrangement | sequence of a regular circulation body falls.

  Means 6. In any one of the above means 1 to 5, the lottery result can be validated over a plurality of game times when winning the lottery of the winning combination, and the lottery result of the winning combination is specified. If the winning combination does not result in winning, a second stop that controls the driving of each of the driving means so that the winning combination or pattern combination can be stopped on the combination line including the first visibly visible position. A gaming machine comprising drive control means (reach eye display function of the main controller 131).

  According to the means 6, when a winning combination for which a lottery result can be valid over a plurality of game times is won and the winning combination is not established, the combination line including the first specified visually recognizable position includes the pattern or the winning pattern. Each drive means is controlled to stop driving so that the combination can be stopped. By adopting such a configuration, it is possible to indicate that the specific combination is won through a sense of incongruity in which a privilege is not given despite the formation of a winning pattern or a combination of patterns.

Mean 7 A plurality of revolving bodies (reels 42L, 42M, 42R) that circulate in the circumferential direction and are provided with a plurality of types of patterns (designs) in the circumferential direction;
A display window (display windows 31L, 31M, 31R) that makes it possible to visually recognize a part of the patterns for each of the circulating bodies;
Start operation means (start lever 71) operated to start the circulation of each of the circuit bodies;
Lottery means (lottery processing function of the main control device 131) for lottery of the role based on the operation of the start operation means;
Drive means (stepping motors 61L, 61M, 61R) provided for each of the rotating bodies and rotating the respective rotating bodies;
Start driving control means (starting interrupt processing function of the main control device 131) for starting and controlling the driving means so as to start the circulation of the circulating bodies based on the operation of the starting operation means;
A plurality of stop operation means (stop switches 72 to 74) operated to individually stop the circulation of each of the circulating bodies;
Based on the operation of each of the stop operation means, if the corresponding orbiting body is stopped, and if the winning combination lottery is won and the stop operation means is operated at a predetermined timing, the winning combination is won. Stop drive control means (reel stop processing function of the main controller 131) for stopping and controlling each of the drive means so that the winning symbol corresponding to the winning combination stops on the effective line;
In a gaming machine provided with a privilege granting means (such as a medal payout process of the main control device 131) for granting a privilege as winning establishment when the winning pattern of each orbiting body stops on the active line,
The display window is configured such that, when each of the rotating bodies is stopped, at least three pictures attached to the specified rotating body (left reel 42L) are visible.
A combination line that connects the visible positions (the upper, middle, and lower positions of the reels 42L, 42M, and 42R) in a straight line so that the pattern can be visually recognized from the display window when the rotating bodies are stopped. Comprising effective line setting means (effective line setting function of the main controller 131) for setting the effective line as the effective line,
The effective line setting means includes a first specified visually recognizable position (middle position) among the specified visually recognizable positions at which a pattern attached to at least the specified circulating body (left reel 42L) among the circulating bodies is visible. ) Is not set as an effective line, and a combination line including a second specified visually recognizable position adjacent to the first specified visually recognizable position can be set as an effective line.
A special combination (BB combination) that allows the lottery result to be valid over a plurality of game times when the winning combination is won,
If each of the winning lottery results is the specific winning combination and the winning combination is not established, the respective driving means so that the winning combination or the combination of the patterns can be stopped in the combination line including the first specified visually recognizable position. A game machine comprising second stop drive control means (reach eye display function of the main control device 131) for stopping and controlling the game machine.

  According to the means 7, the combination line including the first specified visually recognizable position is not set as an effective line among the specified visually recognizable positions at which the pattern attached to at least the specified circulating body is visible among the respective circulating bodies, A combination line including the second prescribed visible position adjacent to the first prescribed visible position can be set as an effective line. That is, the specified visually recognizable position includes a visually recognizable position set as an effective line and a visually recognizable position not set as an effective line. By adopting such a configuration, it is possible to diversify the effective lines as compared to a conventional gaming machine that has a configuration in which a plurality of effective lines can be set using all the visible positions.

  In addition, a combination line that connects the visible positions where the pattern can be visually recognized from the display window when each circuit is stopped is set as an effective line, so that the player can be sure that the winning has been established. It becomes possible to grasp, and it becomes possible to avoid that a player is confused.

  As a result, it is possible to diversify the effective lines that are set while avoiding confusion for the player.

  In addition, when a winning combination for which the lottery result can be valid over a plurality of game times is won and the winning combination is not established, the winning combination is terminated on the combination line including the first specified visually recognizable position. Each drive means is controlled so as to be stopped. By adopting such a configuration, it is possible to indicate that the specific combination is won through a sense of incongruity in which a privilege is not given despite the formation of a winning pattern or a combination of patterns.

Means 8. In the above means 7, correspondence storage means for storing a correspondence relationship between a plurality of partitioned areas that divide each of the circulating bodies in the circumferential direction and a pattern attached to each partitioned area;
When the stop operation means is operated and a stop command is generated, a reaching section area grasping means for grasping a reaching section area that has reached a predetermined specified position among each section area of the corresponding circulating body,
When the stop command is generated, based on the grasping result of the reaching compartment area grasping means, stop compartment area determining means for deciding a stop compartment area to be stopped at the specified position among the respective compartment areas of the corresponding circulating body; ,
Stop information deriving means for deriving stop information to be used when stopping a circulating body for which the stop partition area has not been determined, based on a determination result of the stop partition area determining means;
Comprising stop information storage means for storing the stop information,
Each stop drive control means performs stop drive control on the corresponding drive means so that the stop partition area determined by the stop partition area determination means stops at the specified position,
The stop information deriving means is based on the determination result of the stop section area determining means for a circulating body in which the stop section area is not determined from when the stop command is generated until the next stop command is generated. Deriving stop information for all partitioned areas for each partitioned area,
The stop section area determining means is
When a stop command is generated after the stop information deriving means derives the stop information, an arrival that can reach the specified position within a predetermined specified period based on the grasping result of the reaching section area grasping means Reachable partition area grasping means for grasping the possible partition area;
Comparison determination means for comparing and determining all the stop information of the reachable partition area and the reachable partition area stored in the stop information storage means,
A gaming machine comprising: a stop partition area deriving unit that derives the stop partition area based on a determination result of the comparison determination unit.

  According to the means 8, each circling body is partitioned into a plurality of partitioned areas, and the correspondence relationship with the pattern attached to each partitioned area is stored. Then, when a stop command is generated, after the reaching partition area that has reached the predetermined specified position is grasped and the stop partition area to be stopped at this specified position is determined among the respective partition areas of the corresponding circulating body Circumstance stop control is performed. In addition, for a circling body for which no stop partition area has been determined, the stop partition area determined by the generation of the previous stop command and the partition area after the stop command is generated and before the next stop command is generated Stop information of all the divided areas is derived based on the reaching pattern that reaches the effective position when the specified position is reached, and the stop information is stored in the stop information storage means. By adopting such a configuration, when the next stop command is generated, it becomes possible to perform the stop control of the corresponding circulating body using the stop information stored in the stop information storage means, and the stop command is generated. Sometimes, a stop table that can derive the relationship between the pattern that has reached the effective line and the pattern that is actually stopped on the effective line becomes unnecessary. Therefore, it is possible to reduce the amount of data stored in advance regarding the stop control of each circuit body.

  In addition, in order to derive stop information of all the partition areas based on the stop partition area determined by the generation of the previous stop command, it is possible to change the stop result of the circulating body to be subsequently stopped according to the determination result of the stop partition area. It becomes possible, and it becomes possible to diversify the stop appearance.

  In addition, in order to derive stop information of all the partition areas for the circulating body for which the stop partition area has not been determined until the next stop command is issued, stop while any of the partition areas has reached the specified position. Even if the command is generated, the stop partition area can be determined using the stop information stored in the stop information storage means. That is, the stop section area can be determined relatively easily regardless of the operation timing of the stop operation means.

  In particular, in a gaming machine having three or more orbiting bodies, a situation occurs in which a plurality of orbiting bodies orbits after the stop section area is determined, but when a stop command corresponding to any of the orbiting bodies occurs. Even if it exists, a stop partition area | region can be determined using the stop information memorize | stored in the stop information storage means. That is, the stop section area can be determined relatively easily regardless of the operation order of the stop operation means.

  As a result of the above, it is possible to reduce the processing time required for deriving the stop partition area while avoiding an increase in storage capacity by suppressing an increase in the amount of data related to the stop control of each orbiting body It becomes.

  Further, when a stop command is generated after the stop information is derived, all stop information of the reachable partition area and the reachable partition area is compared and determined, and the stop partition area is derived based on the determination result. By adopting such a configuration, it is possible to derive an optimum partitioned area as a stopped partitioned area among the partitioned areas that can reach the specified position before the specified period elapses after the stop command is generated. That is, it is possible to stop the optimum pattern among the patterns that can reach the effective line on the effective line. Therefore, it is possible to diversify the stop appearance. In addition, the stop information is derived before the stop command is generated, and the stop partition area is derived after the stop command is generated, so that the next stop command can be generated after one circulating body stops. It is possible to reduce the time lag that may occur until In addition, when deriving stop information of all the partition areas for a circulating object for which a stop partition area has not been determined, it is possible to increase processing efficiency.

  Note that the “partition area obtained by partitioning the circulating body in the circumferential direction” may be any configuration as long as the partition area can be grasped at least inside the gaming machine. For example, based on the input of a predetermined detection signal (detection signal of the reel index sensor 55), it is grasped that the rotating body has made one turn, and the specified position is reached by outputting the first predetermined number (24) of pulse signals. In a gaming machine that switches the current pattern to the next pattern, the partition area can be grasped from the number of output pulse signals after the predetermined detection signal is input. Therefore, for example, it is not necessary to have a configuration in which a player or the like can grasp the partition area from the outside of the gaming machine. The same applies to the following.

  Means 9. In the above means 8, the stop information deriving means grasps the reaching pattern for reaching each combination area including the first specified visually recognizable position for each partition area when the partition area reaches the specified position. Based on the means and the lottery result of the combination, it is determined for each partition area whether or not the reaching pattern grasped by the reaching pattern grasping means is prevented from stopping at the combination line including the first specified visually recognizable position. An avoidance determination storage area for storing avoidance determination information indicating a determination result of the avoidance determination means is provided in the stop information storage means.

  According to the means 9, when the partitioned area reaches the specified position, the reaching pattern reaching the combination line including the first specified visually recognizable position is grasped for each partitioned area, and the reached pattern is effective based on the lottery result of the combination Whether to stop at the position is determined for each partition area. Then, avoidance determination information indicating the determination result is stored in an avoidance determination storage area provided in the stop information storage means. By deriving stop information including a determination result on whether or not to stop the arrival pattern from stopping at the combination line including the first specified visually recognizable position, it is not necessary to make the determination after the generation of the stop command. It is possible to derive the stop partition area in a relatively short time.

  Means 10. In the above-mentioned means 9, the avoidance judging means is that the lottery result of the winning combination is not the specific winning combination, but the winning combination is formed on the combination line including the first specified visually recognizable position. In addition, it is determined that the reaching pattern is prevented from stopping at the combination line including the first specified visually recognizable position, and the lottery result of the combination is the specific winning combination, and the first specified visually recognizable position is determined. It is determined that it is not avoided that the reaching pattern stops at the combination line including the first specified visually recognizable position when a winning pattern is formed on the combination line including the winning combination. Gaming machine.

  According to the means 10, in the situation where the specific combination is not won, when the winning pattern or the combination of the patterns is formed on the combination line including the first specified visually recognizable position, the reached pattern is the first specified visual recognition. In a situation where it is determined to avoid stopping at a combination line including a possible position, and a situation where a specific combination is won, a pattern or a combination of patterns that forms a winning combination is formed on the combination line including the first specified visually recognizable position. In this case, it is not determined to prevent the reaching pattern from stopping at the combination line including the first specified visually recognizable position. By adopting such a configuration, it is possible to increase the chances of stopping the pattern or the combination of patterns that are awarded in the combination line including the first specified visually recognizable position in the situation where the specific combination is won. As a result, it is possible to urge the next game round to establish a specific winning combination through the result of the suspension of the circuit body, and it is possible to reduce the chance that the player suffers a disadvantage.

  Furthermore, by applying this configuration, it is possible to suitably reduce the amount of data stored in advance for stop control of each circulating body. Store a stop table that can derive the relationship between the pattern that has reached the effective line when the stop command is generated and the pattern that is actually stopped on the effective line, and use the stop table to In the configuration for performing the body stop control, in addition to the stop table for stopping the winning pattern or the combination of the pictures on the effective line, the stop table for stopping the combination line including the first specified visually recognizable position. Need to be stored, and there is concern about an increase in the amount of data. On the other hand, the stop section area is determined using the stop information stored in the stop information storage means, and it is avoided that the design or the combination of the designs that will win a winning combination is stopped on the combination line including the first specified visually recognizable position. This is because, in this configuration for deriving the avoidance determination information indicating whether or not, each of the stop tables is not necessary.

Means 11. A plurality of circling bodies that circulate in the circumferential direction and that are provided with a plurality of kinds of patterns in the circumferential direction;
A display window that allows a part of the design to be visually recognized with respect to each orbiting body,
Start operation means operated to start the circulation of each of the circulating bodies;
Lottery means for performing a lottery of a role based on the operation of the start operation means;
A driving means provided for each of the rotating bodies, and for rotating each of the rotating bodies;
Start drive control means for starting and controlling the drive means so as to start the circulation of the revolving bodies based on the operation of the start operation means;
A plurality of stop operation means operated to individually stop the lap of each of the lap members;
Based on the operation of each of the stop operation means, if the corresponding orbiting body is stopped, and if the winning combination lottery is won and the stop operation means is operated at a predetermined timing, the winning combination is won. Stop drive control means for stopping and controlling each of the drive means so that the winning pattern corresponding to the winning role stops at an effective position visible from the display window;
In the gaming machine provided with a privilege granting means for granting a privilege as a winning establishment, when the winning design stops at the effective position forming a predetermined combination,
A correspondence storage means for storing a correspondence relationship between a plurality of partition regions each partitioning each of the circulating bodies in the circumferential direction, and a pattern attached to each partition region;
When the stop operation means is operated and a stop command is generated, a reaching section area grasping means for grasping a reaching section area that has reached a predetermined specified position among each section area of the corresponding circulating body,
When the stop command is generated, based on the grasping result of the reaching compartment area grasping means, stop compartment area determining means for deciding a stop compartment area to be stopped at the specified position among the respective compartment areas of the corresponding circulating body; ,
Stop information deriving means for deriving stop information to be used when stopping a circulating body for which the stop partition area has not been determined, based on a determination result of the stop partition area determining means;
Comprising stop information storage means for storing the stop information,
The stop drive control means performs stop drive control of the corresponding drive means so that the stop partition area determined by the stop partition area determination means stops at the specified position,
The stop information deriving means is based on the determination result of the stop section area determining means for a circulating body in which the stop section area is not determined from when the stop command is generated until the next stop command is generated. Deriving stop information for all partitioned areas for each partitioned area,
The stop section area determining means is
When a stop command is generated after the stop information deriving means derives the stop information, an arrival that can reach the specified position within a predetermined specified period based on the grasping result of the reaching section area grasping means Reachable partition area grasping means for grasping the possible partition area;
Comparison determination means for comparing and determining all the stop information of the reachable partition area and the reachable partition area stored in the stop information storage means,
A gaming machine comprising: a stop partition area deriving unit that derives the stop partition area based on a determination result of the comparison determination unit.

  According to the means 11, each circling body is partitioned into a plurality of partitioned areas, and the correspondence relationship with the pattern attached to each partitioned area is stored. Then, when a stop command is generated, after the reaching partition area that has reached the predetermined specified position is grasped and the stop partition area to be stopped at this specified position is determined among the respective partition areas of the corresponding circulating body Circumstance stop control is performed. In addition, for a circling body for which no stop partition area has been determined, the stop partition area determined by the generation of the previous stop command and the partition area after the stop command is generated and before the next stop command is generated Stop information of all the divided areas is derived based on the reaching pattern that reaches the effective position when the specified position is reached, and the stop information is stored in the stop information storage means. By adopting such a configuration, when the next stop command is generated, it becomes possible to perform the stop control of the corresponding circulating body using the stop information stored in the stop information storage means, and the stop command is generated. Sometimes, a stop table that can derive the relationship between the pattern that has reached the effective position and the pattern that is actually stopped at the effective position becomes unnecessary. Therefore, it is possible to reduce the amount of data stored in advance regarding the stop control of each circuit body.

  In addition, in order to derive stop information of all the partition areas based on the stop partition area determined by the generation of the previous stop command, it is possible to change the stop result of the circulating body to be subsequently stopped according to the determination result of the stop partition area. It becomes possible, and it becomes possible to diversify the stop appearance.

  In addition, in order to derive stop information of all the partition areas for the circulating body for which the stop partition area has not been determined until the next stop command is issued, stop while any of the partition areas has reached the specified position. Even if the command is generated, the stop partition area can be determined using the stop information stored in the stop information storage means. That is, the stop section area can be determined relatively easily regardless of the operation timing of the stop operation means.

  In particular, in a gaming machine having three or more orbiting bodies, a situation occurs in which a plurality of orbiting bodies orbits after the stop section area is determined, but when a stop command corresponding to any of the orbiting bodies occurs. Even if it exists, a stop partition area | region can be determined using the stop information memorize | stored in the stop information storage means. That is, the stop section area can be determined relatively easily regardless of the operation order of the stop operation means.

  As a result of the above, it is possible to reduce the processing time required for deriving the stop partition area while avoiding an increase in storage capacity by suppressing an increase in the amount of data related to the stop control of each orbiting body It becomes.

  Further, when a stop command is generated after the stop information is derived, all stop information of the reachable partition area and the reachable partition area is compared and determined, and the stop partition area is derived based on the determination result. By adopting such a configuration, it is possible to derive an optimum partitioned area as a stopped partitioned area among the partitioned areas that can reach the specified position before the specified period elapses after the stop command is generated. That is, it is possible to stop the optimum pattern among the patterns that can reach the effective position at the effective position. Therefore, it is possible to diversify the stop appearance. In addition, the stop information is derived before the stop command is generated, and the stop partition area is derived after the stop command is generated, so that the next stop command can be generated after one circulating body stops. It is possible to reduce the time lag that may occur until In addition, when deriving stop information of all the partition areas for a circulating object for which a stop partition area has not been determined, it is possible to increase processing efficiency.

  Means 12. In the above means 11, the stop information deriving means comprises a reaching picture grasping means for grasping, for each partition area, a reaching pattern that reaches the effective position when the partition area reaches the specified position, and the reaching pattern grasping means. A winning possibility judging means for judging the possibility of winning a prize for each divided area based on the winning design and the lottery result of the combination, and the stop information storage means is judged by the winning possibility judging means A gaming machine comprising a winning possibility storage area for storing winning possibility information indicating a result.

  According to the means 12, when the divided area reaches the specified position, the reaching pattern reaching the effective position is grasped for each divided area, and the possibility of winning is determined based on the lottery result of the reached pattern and the combination. The The winning possibility information indicating the determination result is stored in a winning possibility storage area provided in the stop information storage means. By deriving stop information including the determination result of the possibility of winning a prize, it is not necessary to make the determination after the stop command is generated, so it is necessary to stop the pattern corresponding to the winning role in an effective position. Even if it exists, it becomes possible to derive a stop section area in a relatively short time.

  Means 13. In the means 12, the type of the combination includes a carry-over type that can be effective over a plurality of game times when won and a non-carry-over type that is effective only for the selected game times, and the stop A gaming machine, wherein the information storage means is provided with a different storage area for each of the role types as the winning possibility storage area.

  According to the means 13, since at least a different storage area is provided for each role type as the winning possibility storage area, even if a plurality of roles having different role types are won, the stop information is compared and determined. A picture to be preferentially stopped at the effective position can be derived. Therefore, it is possible to derive the stop partition area in a relatively short time. In addition, by providing different storage areas for the carry-over role type and the non-carry-over role type, it is possible to determine the priority order of the role types that establish a winning in the stop information.

  Means 14. In the means 13, the stop information deriving means derives numerical information corresponding to a benefit given when the winning is established when the winning possibility judging means determines that there is a possibility of winning. And a bonus storage area for storing numerical information derived by the bonus derivation means is provided separately from the winning possibility storage area.

  According to the means 14, when there is a possibility that a winning is established, a privilege given when the winning is established is grasped and corresponding numerical information is derived. And the said numerical information is memorize | stored in the privilege memory area provided in the stop information memory | storage means. With this configuration, it is possible to set a plurality of roles belonging to the same role type while suppressing an increase in the storage capacity of the stop information storage unit. Therefore, it becomes possible to increase the degree of freedom in designing the internal specifications of the gaming machine. In addition, for example, when a winning command is issued at a timing at which a plurality of roles having different privileges to be awarded and a pattern corresponding to any role can be stopped at an effective position, etc. It is also possible to derive the stop partition area so that the pattern corresponding to the role to which a large privilege is given stops at the effective position. Therefore, it is possible to ensure the superiority of the player.

  Means 15. The means 14 includes effective position setting means capable of setting a plurality of effective positions, and the winning possibility determination means sequentially determines the possibility of winning winning for each effective position set by the effective position setting means. The privilege deriving means derives the numerical information every time the winning possibility determination means determines that there is a possibility of winning, and the numerical value derived by the privilege deriving means is stored in the privilege storage area. A gaming machine characterized in that information is sequentially updated.

  According to the means 15, when a plurality of effective positions are set, the possibility of winning is determined for each effective position, and when there is a possibility of winning, the numerical information in the privilege storage area is sequentially updated. Is done. By adopting such a configuration, for example, when one winning combination is won, it is possible to derive the stop partition area so that there is a possibility of winning winning at a plurality of effective positions. Therefore, it is possible to reduce the chances of missing a prize that is not established even though the winning combination is won, and it is possible to secure the superiority of the player.

  Means 16. In the above means 14 or 15, the privilege deriving means derives information corresponding to the number of game media to be paid out when winning is established as the numerical information.

  According to the means 16, the number of game media to be paid out when winning is established is derived as numerical information. Since the data that determines the number of game media to be paid out when a winning is established is essential data as data relating to awarding, the amount of data stored in advance is reduced by deriving information corresponding to the number of game media as numerical information. It becomes possible.

  Means 17. A gaming machine according to any one of the means 13 to 16, wherein the stop information storage means is configured in bytes, and the comparison determination means is configured to compare and determine the stop information in bytes.

  According to the means 17, since the stop information storage means is configured in byte units and the stop information is compared and determined in byte units, the processing load can be reduced compared to the configuration in which comparison determination is performed in bit units. It becomes.

  Means 18. In the means 17, the first winning possibility storage area for storing the first winning possibility information indicating the possibility of winning the prize corresponding to the carry-over role type, and the possibility of winning the prize corresponding to the non-carry-over role type. And a second winning possibility storage area for storing second winning possibility information indicating a 1-byte storage.

  According to the means 18, since each winning possibility storage area is stored in 1 byte, each winning possibility information can be compared and determined simultaneously when stop information is compared and determined. In addition, the priority order of the role that establishes the winning pattern, that is, the picture that is preferentially stopped at the effective position, can be determined by the arrangement of each winning possibility storage area.

  Means 19. In the means 17 or 18, the stop partition area deriving means is configured to derive a partition area corresponding to the stop information determined to be the largest by the comparison determination means as the stop partition area, and the winning possibility storage area Is provided above the privilege storage area.

  According to the means 19, since the winning possibility storage area is provided on the upper side of the privilege storage area, the priority order of the role type for establishing the winning is determined by the winning possibility storage area, and the priority order in the same role type is stored as the privilege. Can be determined by area. In addition, if the winning possibility storage area and the privilege storage area are stored in 1 byte, it is possible to compare and determine the winning possibility information and the numerical information included in each stop information at the same time instead of individually comparing and determining. Become. Therefore, it is possible to reduce the processing load.

  Means 20. In the above means 12, as the type of the combination, a payout type to which a privilege for paying out a game medium when a winning is established, and a non-payout type that grants another privilege without paying out a game medium when a winning is established, The stop information storage means includes at least a different storage area for each of the role types as the winning possibility storage area.

  According to the means 20, since at least a different storage area for each role type is provided as the winning possibility storage area, even if a plurality of roles with different role types are won, the stop information is compared and determined. A picture to be preferentially stopped at the effective position can be derived. Therefore, it is possible to derive the stop partition area in a relatively short time. Also, by providing different storage areas for the paying-out role types and the non-paying-out role types, it is possible to determine the priority order of the role types that establish a winning in the stop information.

  Note that any of the means 13 to 19 may be applied to this means, and in such a case, a synergistic effect can be expected.

  Means 21. In the means 12, the carry-over role type that can be valid over a plurality of game times when winning, the re-game role type to which a re-game privilege is awarded when the winning is established, and the game when the winning is established. A payout role type to which a privilege for paying out a medium is provided, and the stop information storage means has at least a different storage area for each of the role types as the winning possibility storage area Machine.

  According to the means 21, since at least a different storage area for each role type is provided as the winning possibility storage area, even if a plurality of roles having different role types are won, the stop information is compared and determined. A picture to be preferentially stopped at the effective position can be derived. Therefore, it is possible to derive the stop partition area in a relatively short time. In addition, by providing different storage areas for the carry-over role type, the re-playing role type, and the payout role type, it is possible to determine the priority order of the role types that establish a winning in the stop information.

  Note that any of the means 13 to 19 may be applied to this means, and in such a case, a synergistic effect can be expected.

  Means 22. In the above means 11, the stop information deriving means comprises a reaching pattern grasping means for grasping a reaching pattern reaching the effective position for each partition area when the partition area reaches the specified position, and the reaching pattern grasping means. The winning possibility judging means for judging the possibility of winning a prize for each section area based on the winning design and the lottery result of the combination, and the winning possibility judging means judged that the winning possibility could be established. A privilege deriving unit for deriving numerical information corresponding to the privilege given when the winning is established, and the stop information storage unit has a privilege storage area for storing the numerical information derived by the privilege deriving unit A gaming machine characterized by being provided.

  According to the means 22, when the divided area reaches the specified position, the reaching pattern reaching the effective position is grasped for each divided area, and the possibility of winning a prize is determined based on the lottery result of the reached pattern and the combination. The If there is a possibility that a winning will be established, the privilege granted when the winning is established is grasped and the corresponding numerical information is derived, and the numerical information is stored in the privilege storage area provided in the stop information storage means. Remembered. With such a configuration, for example, when a plurality of roles with different privileges to be awarded are won and a stop command is generated at a timing at which a pattern corresponding to any role can be stopped at an effective position, etc. It is possible to derive a stop section area so that a pattern corresponding to a role to which a privilege with a high degree of advantage is granted at the time of establishment is stopped at an effective position. Therefore, it is possible to ensure the superiority of the player. In addition, since it is not necessary to perform each of the above processes after the stop command is generated, it is possible to derive the stop partition area in a relatively short time even when it is necessary to stop the pattern corresponding to the winning combination at the effective position. Is possible.

  Note that the means 15 or 16 may be applied to this means, and in such a case, a synergistic effect can be expected.

  Means 23. In the means 11, the stop information deriving means includes a reaching pattern grasping means for grasping a reaching pattern that reaches the effective position for each partition area when the partition area reaches the specified position, and a lottery result of the combination On the basis of the arriving picture grasping means, the avoidance judging means for judging for each partition area whether to avoid the arrival picture grasped by the effective position to stop at the effective position, the stop information storage means, A gaming machine comprising an avoidance determination storage area for storing avoidance determination information indicating a determination result of the avoidance determination means.

  According to the means 23, when the division area reaches the specified position, the reaching pattern reaching the effective position is grasped for each division area, and the arrival pattern is prevented from stopping at the effective position based on the lottery result of the combination. Is determined for each partition area. Then, avoidance determination information indicating the determination result is stored in an avoidance determination storage area provided in the stop information storage means. By deriving stop information including a determination result as to whether or not to stop the arrived pattern at the effective position, it is not necessary to make the determination after the stop command is generated. Can be derived.

Means 24. In the above means 23, the avoidance judging means judges whether or not a winning corresponding to a winning combination not won in the winning combination is established.
A gaming machine characterized in that, when it is determined that the avoidance determination means is established, it is avoided that the reaching pattern as a determination target is stopped at the effective position.

  According to this means, it is possible to avoid the occurrence of problems such as winning a prize despite not having won a lottery of winning combination, or winning a prize not corresponding to the winning combination of winning combination. it can.

  Means 25. In the above means 24, the avoidance judging means makes the judgment only when the number of the circulating bodies for which the stop section area is not determined is one.

  According to this means, since the avoidance determination is made only when there is only one orbiting body for which no stop partition area has been determined, the processing time required for deriving the stop information is shortened. It becomes possible to suppress the monotonization of the stop event. That is, in a situation where there are a plurality of circling bodies for which stop zone areas are not determined, stop information for all the zone areas of these circling bodies is derived, and therefore avoidance determination leads to an increase in processing time. . In addition, in a case where it is determined that the winning combination corresponding to the winning combination corresponding to the winning combination that has not been won in the above-mentioned situation can be established, the effective position has a pattern corresponding to the winning combination in the winning combination drawing. This is because only the stoppage is stopped and the stoppage is significantly limited.

Means 26. In the above means 24 or 25, the stop information deriving means judges the possibility of winning a prize for each partition area based on the reaching picture grasped by the reaching picture grasping means and the lottery result of the combination. Means (winning symbol establishment determination processing function S1812 of the main control device 131), and the stop information storage means stores a winning possibility storage area for storing winning possibility information indicating the determination result of the winning possibility determination means ( Replay bit, BB role bit, small role bit in decision value calculation information buffer B)
Further, the winning possibility determination means does not determine the possibility of winning when the reaching pattern grasped by the reaching picture grasping means is prevented from stopping at the effective position. .

  According to the present means, the possibility of winning a prize is determined based on the reached picture and the lottery result of the combination. The winning possibility information indicating the determination result is stored in a winning possibility storage area provided in the stop information storage means. By deriving stop information including the determination result of the possibility of winning a prize, it is not necessary to make the determination after the stop command is generated, so it is necessary to stop the pattern corresponding to the winning role in an effective position. Even if it exists, it becomes possible to derive a stop section area in a relatively short time. In addition, when it is avoided that the reaching pattern stops at the effective position, the processing time necessary for deriving the stop information can be shortened by adopting a configuration that does not determine the possibility of winning. it can.

  Note that any one of the above means 13 to 22 may be applied to this means, and in such a case, a synergistic effect can be expected.

Means 27. In the means 23, the avoidance determining means determines whether or not the result of lottery of the combination is a specific combination winning and the same stop result is obtained as when the specific combination winning is not established,
A gaming machine characterized in that, when it is determined by the avoidance determination means that the same stop result is obtained, it is avoided that the reaching pattern as a determination target is stopped at the effective position.

  According to this means, when the lottery result of the combination is a specific combination winning and the same stop result is obtained as when the specific combination winning is not established, it is avoided that the reaching pattern stops at the effective position. By adopting such a configuration, it is possible to make the stopping outcome different between a case where a specific combination is won and a specific combination winning is not established and a case where a specific combination is not won. Therefore, it is possible to indicate to the player that the specific combination has been won through the result of the suspension of the orbiting body, and the game can be prevented from becoming monotonous.

  Means 28. In the above means 27, the specific combination is a combination in which the lottery result can be valid over a plurality of game times when the lottery of the combination is won.

  According to this means, when a specific combination wins a combination lottery, the lottery result may be valid over a plurality of game times. By applying the above configuration to such a specific combination, it is possible to prompt the next game round to establish a specific combination prize through the result of the suspension of the circuit body, and it is possible to reduce the chance that the player suffers a disadvantage. Become.

Means 29. In the above means 23, the avoidance determining means determines whether or not a predetermined combination that is visible from the display window and that establishes a prize is formed at a position different from the effective position,
A game characterized in that, when it is determined by the avoidance determination means that the predetermined combination is formed, it is avoided that the reaching pattern as a determination target is stopped at the effective position. Machine.

  According to this means, it is avoided that the reaching pattern stops at the effective position when a predetermined combination that is visible from the display window and that establishes a prize is formed at a position different from the effective position. By adopting such a configuration, it is possible to avoid a problem that a player misunderstands that a bonus is not given even though a winning is established.

  The avoidance determination is performed when the specific combination for which the lottery result can be valid over a plurality of game times is not won, and the avoidance determination is not performed when the specific combination is won. Thus, it is possible to prompt the next game round to establish a special winning combination through the result of the suspension of the circuit body, and it is possible to reduce the chance that the player suffers a disadvantage.

Means 30. In the above means 23, the avoidance determining means is a first avoidance determining means for determining whether or not a winning corresponding to a winning combination not won in the winning combination is established (unfair winning determination processing function of the main control device 131). ) And second avoidance determination means for determining whether or not the result of lottery winning of the combination is a specific combination winning and the specific combination winning is not achieved (the main controller 131 kick determination appearance processing) Function S1828),
When it is determined that the first avoidance determination unit determines that the reaching pattern is determined to be stopped at the effective position, the second avoidance determination unit has the same stop result. When it is determined that the reaching pattern that is the determination target is prevented from stopping at the effective position,
The stop information storage means stores, as the avoidance determination storage area, a first avoidance determination storage area for storing first avoidance determination information indicating the determination result of the first avoidance determination means (inappropriate in the determination value calculation information buffer B). (Winning determination bit) and a second avoidance determination storage area for storing second avoidance determination information indicating the determination result of the second avoidance determination means (a kick determination bit in the determination value calculation information buffer B) are separately provided. A gaming machine characterized by that.

  According to this means, it is possible to avoid the occurrence of problems such as winning a prize despite not having won a lottery of winning combination, or winning a prize not corresponding to the winning combination of winning combination. it can. In addition, it is possible to make the stop appearance different between the case where the specific combination is won and the specific combination winning is not established and the case where the specific combination is not won. Therefore, it is possible to indicate to the player that the specific combination has been won through the result of the suspension of the orbiting body, and the game can be prevented from becoming monotonous. Furthermore, by providing the first avoidance determination storage area and the second avoidance determination storage area separately, a partition area where a winning corresponding to a winning combination that is not won in the winning combination is established, and the winning lottery result indicates the specified winning combination. Even if there are consecutive divisional areas that result in the same stop result as the case where the winning combination is not established, it is possible to make a difference in the stop information of these divisional areas, and the lottery will be won It is possible to avoid a problem that a winning corresponding to a combination that has not been made is established.

  Any one of the means 25, 26, and 28 may be applied to this means, and in such a case, a synergistic effect can be expected.

Means 31. In the above means 23, the avoidance determining means is a first avoidance determining means for determining whether or not a winning corresponding to a winning combination not won in the winning combination is established (unfair winning determination processing function of the main control device 131). ) And second avoidance judging means for judging whether or not a predetermined combination is established in a position different from the effective position that is visible from the display window, and a winning eye appears in the main controller 131 Determination processing function S1828),
When it is determined that the first avoidance determination means is established, it is possible to avoid that the reaching pattern as a determination target is stopped at the effective position, and the second avoidance determination means is configured to perform the predetermined combination. When it is determined that is formed, it is a configuration that prevents the reaching pattern that is the determination target to stop at the effective position,
The stop information storage means stores, as the avoidance determination storage area, a first avoidance determination storage area for storing first avoidance determination information indicating the determination result of the first avoidance determination means (inappropriate in the determination value calculation information buffer B). (Winning determination bit) and a second avoidance determination storage area for storing second avoidance determination information indicating the determination result of the second avoidance determination means (a kick determination bit in the determination value calculation information buffer B) are separately provided. A gaming machine characterized by that.

  According to this means, it is possible to avoid the occurrence of problems such as winning a prize despite not having won a lottery of winning combination, or winning a prize not corresponding to the winning combination of winning combination. it can. In addition, it is possible to avoid a problem that a player misunderstands that a prize is not given even though a winning is established. Furthermore, by providing the first avoidance determination storage area and the second avoidance determination storage area separately, it is visible from the display area and the partition area where the winning corresponding to the winning combination that is not won by the winning combination is established. Even if there are consecutive divisional areas where a predetermined combination for winning a prize is formed at a position different from the effective position, it is possible to make a difference in the stop information of these divisional areas, and the winning lottery will be won It is possible to avoid a problem that a winning corresponding to a combination that has not been made is established.

  Note that the means 25 or 26 may be applied to this means, and in such a case, a synergistic effect can be expected.

  Means 32. In the means 30 or 31, the stop partition area deriving means is configured to derive a partition area corresponding to the stop information determined to be the largest by the comparison determination means as the stop partition area, and the first avoidance determination memory A gaming machine characterized in that an area is provided above the second avoidance determination storage area.

  According to the means 32, since the first avoidance determination storage area is provided on the higher side than the second avoidance determination storage area, it is possible to preferentially avoid the winning corresponding to the winning combination not winning the winning combination. , Avoiding the same stop result as the case where the combination lottery result is the specific combination winning and the specific combination winning is not established, or the winning is established at a position that is visible from the display window and is different from the effective position. It is possible to avoid the formation of a predetermined combination.

  Any one of the means 12 to 22 may be applied to any of the means 23 to 32, and in such a case, a synergistic effect can be expected.

  In particular, when any one of the means 12 to 22 is applied to any of the means 30 to 32, the second avoidance determination storage area is provided on the lower side than the winning possibility storage area or the privilege storage area. A winning can be established with priority over the effective position, and the player's superiority can be secured. In addition, in a situation where a plurality of roles with different privileges are elected, a winning corresponding to a role to which a privilege with a large degree of advantage is awarded can be established preferentially, and the player's superiority is secured. can do.

  Means 33. In the above means 11, the stop information deriving means comprises priority deriving means for deriving a priority for each partition area, and the stop information storage means includes priority information indicating a deriving result of the priority deriving means. A gaming machine comprising a priority storage area for storing

  According to the means 33, the priority is derived for each partition area, and the priority information indicating the derivation result is stored in the priority storage area provided in the stop information storage means. By adopting such a configuration, when a stop command is generated, stop information including priority information derived for the reachable partition area and the reachable partition area may be compared and determined. It can be derived. Further, by deriving the priority for each partition area, it is possible to diversify the stop outcome.

  Means 34. In the above-mentioned means 33, the priority deriving means derives the priority only when a predetermined combination in which a winning is established is won only when the stop command is generated at a predetermined timing. Machine.

  According to the means 34, the priority is derived only when the stop command is generated at a predetermined timing, and the priority is derived when the predetermined winning combination is established, so that the stop command is not generated at the predetermined timing, for example. It is possible to diversify the stopping points in game times where no winnings are established.

  Means 35. In the above means 33 or 34, the priority deriving means derives the priority when the lottery result of the combination is out of play.

  According to the means 35, since the priority is derived in the case of losing, it is possible to diversify the stop outcomes in such a situation, and to suppress the monotonization of the game.

  Means 36. A gaming machine according to any one of the means 33 to 35, wherein a priority preparation information group in which priority preparation information for deriving the priority is determined for each partition area is provided.

  According to the means 36, by providing the priority preparation information group in which the priority preparation information is determined for each partition area, the priority is derived so as to be the stop point desired by the designer who designs the gaming machine. Is possible.

  Means 37. In the means 36, the priority preparation information group is provided in association with the role, and the priority preparation information group includes the largest priority preparation information of the first division area where the pattern forming the prize is located, Among the second partition areas where the design forming the winning prize stops at a position where it cannot be visually recognized from the display window, the priority preparation information of the predetermined second partition area is smaller than the priority preparation information of the first partition area, A gaming machine, wherein priority information of a partition area other than one partition area and the predetermined second partition area is set smaller than priority preparation information of the predetermined second partition area.

  According to the means 37, since the priority preparation information group is provided in correspondence with the role, it is possible to make a stop event corresponding to the lottery result of the role, and it is possible to diversify the stop event. . In the priority preparation information group, the priority preparation information of the first partition area where the picture forming the winning is located is the largest, and the second partition area where the picture forming the winning is stopped at a position where it cannot be visually recognized from the display window. Among these, the priority preparation information of the predetermined second partition area is smaller than the priority preparation information of the first partition area, and the priority information of the partition areas other than the first partition area and the predetermined second partition area is set to the predetermined second partition area. It was set smaller than the priority preparation information. Accordingly, assuming a case where a stop command is generated at a timing at which a picture forming a prize can be stopped at an effective position, a priority is derived so that the picture preferentially stops at an effective position, Assuming that a stop command is generated at a timing when it is impossible to stop the pattern at the effective position, a priority is derived so that the pattern located in the predetermined second partition area preferentially stops at the effective position. Can do.

  Means 38. In the means 37, an effective position setting means capable of setting a plurality of effective positions and a preferential effective position for preferentially stopping a picture located in the first divided area or the predetermined second divided area are determined. Priority effective position information storage means for storing priority effective position information, and the priority deriving means sequentially derives the priority of each effective position using the priority preparation information group and the priority effective position information. The stop information storage means includes a first priority storage area in which priority information indicating the highest priority derived by the priority derivation means is stored as the priority storage area, and the priority effective position. A gaming machine, comprising: a second priority storage area for storing priority effective position information indicating that a picture located in the first partition area or the predetermined second partition area is stopped.

  According to the means 38, the priority of each effective position is sequentially derived using the priority preparation information group and the prioritized effective position information, and the priority deriving means is derived as a priority storage area in the stop information storage means. First priority storage area storing priority information indicating the highest priority, and priority effective position information indicating that a picture located in the first partition area or the predetermined second partition area stops at the priority effective position. Since the second priority storage area to be stored is provided, the number of priority preparation information groups prepared in advance can be reduced.

  Any one of the means 12 to 32 may be applied to any of the means 33 to 38, and in such a case, a synergistic effect can be expected. In particular, if any one of the above means 12 to 32 is applied to any of the above means 36 to 38, the priority preparation information for the winning combination that can establish a prize regardless of the operation timing of the stop operation means. A group becomes unnecessary, and it becomes possible to reduce the amount of data suitably.

  Means 39. In any one of the above means 11 to 38, the second stop for deriving stop information of all the divided areas for the specified circulating body until the first stop command is generated after all of the circulating bodies start circulating. A gaming machine comprising information deriving means.

  According to the means 39, the stop information of all the divided areas is derived for the specified circuit body from when all the circuit bodies start to rotate until the first stop command is generated, and the stop information is stored in the stop information storage means. Is remembered. By adopting such a configuration, when a stop command for stopping the specified circuit body first is generated, it is possible to perform stop control of the specified circuit body using the stop information stored in the stop information storage means. It becomes. This eliminates the need for a stop table relating to the prescribed circuit body, and makes it possible to reduce the amount of data stored in advance for stop control of each circuit body.

  Means 40. In the means 39, the second stop information deriving means includes a reaching pattern grasping means for grasping, for each partition area, a reaching pattern that reaches the effective position when the partition area reaches the specified position, and the reaching pattern. A winning possibility judging means for judging the possibility of establishment of a winning for each partition area based on the grasping result of the grasping means and the lottery result of the combination, and the stop information storage means includes the winning possibility judging means A gaming machine comprising a winning possibility storage area for storing winning possibility information indicating the determination result.

  According to the means 40, when the divided area reaches the specified position, the reached pattern reaching the effective position is grasped for each divided area, and the possibility of winning a prize is determined based on the lottery result of the reached pattern and the combination. The The winning possibility information indicating the determination result is stored in a winning possibility storage area provided in the stop information storage means. By deriving stop information including the determination result of the possibility of winning a prize, it is not necessary to make the determination after the stop command is generated, so it is necessary to stop the pattern corresponding to the winning role in an effective position. Even if it exists, it becomes possible to derive a stop section area in a relatively short time.

  Means 41. In the means 40, when the second stop information deriving means determines that the winning possibility judging means has a possibility of winning, a privilege for deriving numerical information corresponding to the benefit given when the winning is established. A gaming machine comprising derivation means, wherein the stop information storage means is provided with a privilege storage area for storing numerical information derived by the privilege derivation means.

  According to the means 41, when there is a possibility of winning, a privilege given when the winning is established is grasped and corresponding numerical information is derived. And the said numerical information is memorize | stored in the privilege memory area provided in the stop information memory | storage means. With such a configuration, for example, when a plurality of roles with different privileges to be awarded are won and a stop command is generated at a timing at which a pattern corresponding to any role can be stopped at an effective position, etc. It is possible to derive a stop section area so that a pattern corresponding to a role to which a privilege with a high degree of advantage is granted at the time of establishment is stopped at an effective position. Therefore, it is possible to ensure the superiority of the player.

  Means 42. The means 41 includes effective position setting means capable of setting a plurality of effective positions, and the winning possibility determination means sequentially determines the possibility of winning a prize for each effective position set by the effective position setting means. The privilege deriving means derives the numerical information every time the winning possibility determination means determines that there is a possibility of winning, and the numerical value derived by the privilege deriving means is stored in the privilege storage area. A gaming machine characterized in that information is sequentially updated.

  According to the means 42, when a plurality of effective positions are set, the possibility of winning is determined for each effective position. When there is a possibility of winning, the numerical information in the privilege storage area is sequentially updated. Is done. By adopting such a configuration, for example, when one winning combination is won, it is possible to derive the stop partition area so that there is a possibility of winning winning at a plurality of effective positions. Therefore, it is possible to reduce the chances of missing a prize that is not established even though the winning combination is won, and it is possible to secure the superiority of the player.

  Means 43. In the means 42, the effective position setting means can set a plurality of the effective positions at a first position where the prescribed circuit body can be visually recognized from the display window, and the privilege deriving means can receive the prize. When the sex determining means determines that there is a possibility of winning a prize at one effective position including the first position, the numerical information is derived, and the winning possibility determining means determines whether there is another winning position including the first position. A gaming machine characterized by deriving numerical information indicating that a privilege is not granted when it is determined that there is a possibility of winning a prize at an effective position.

  According to the means 43, there are cases where a plurality of effective positions are set as the first position at which the predetermined circuit body can be viewed from the display window. When it is determined that there is a possibility of winning at one effective position including the first position, the numerical information corresponding to the privilege given at the time of winning is derived, If it is determined that there is a possibility of winning at the valid position, numerical information indicating that no privilege is granted is derived. By adopting such a configuration, when a stop command is generated to stop the specified circuit body first, the stop section area is derived so that the pattern corresponding to the winning combination stops at the first position, and the stop appearance is It becomes possible to suppress monotonization.

  Means 44. In the above means 43, when the effective position setting means sets a plurality of effective positions including the first position, the effective position setting means sets one effective position at a second position where the prescribed rotating body can be visually recognized from the display window. A gaming machine characterized by

  According to the means 44, when a plurality of effective positions including the first position are set, one effective position is set as the second position where the prescribed circuit body can be visually recognized from the display window. In such a configuration, the first division area where the winning combination is won, and the pattern corresponding to the winning combination has reached the first position, and the second division area where the pattern has reached the second position, Is included in the reachable partition area, the numerical information corresponding to the granted privilege is sequentially updated for each valid position, and the numerical information stored in the privilege storage area of the first partition area is the second partition area. It becomes larger than the numerical information stored in the privilege storage area. For this reason, a 1st division area will be derived | led-out as a stop division area. In other words, when a stop command is generated to stop the specified circuit body first at a timing at which the picture corresponding to the winning combination can be stopped at either the first position or the second position, There is a concern that the pattern will stop, and that there will be a risk of the monotonous stoppage of the prescribed circuit. Therefore, for the effective position including the first position, it is possible to avoid the above-mentioned concern by deriving numerical information corresponding to a privilege given only for one effective position.

  Note that the second stop information deriving means may include the means shown in the means 16 to 38, and in such a case, a synergistic effect can be expected. Further, if the stop information derived by the stop information deriving unit and the stop information derived by the second stop information deriving unit are stored in the same storage area, the storage capacity of the stop information storing unit can be reduced. it can.

  Means 45. In any one of the above means 39 to 44, the second stop information deriving means derives the stop information while the start drive control means is performing start drive control of the drive means. To play.

  According to the means 45, since the stop information is derived while each drive means is under the start drive control, until the first stop command can be generated after each circulation body starts the circulation. It is possible to reduce the time lag that can occur.

  Means 46. In any one of the above-mentioned means 39 to 45, a first process execution means that starts when the power is turned on and repeats a series of first processes, and periodically interrupts the process by the first process execution means. A second process execution means for performing a second process, wherein the first process execution means includes the second stop information derivation means, and the second process execution means includes the start drive control means. Gaming machine.

  According to the means 46, the stop information is derived in the first process that is started and repeated when the power is turned on, and each drive means is included in the second process that is periodically interrupted to the first process. Starting drive control is performed. By adopting such a configuration, it is possible to reduce a time lag that can occur from the time when each circulating body starts to circulate until the first stop command can be generated. It is also possible to derive the stop information while smoothly circulating each circulating body. If the configuration is such that the start drive control of each driving means is performed in the first process and the stop information is derived in the second process, the second process is performed multiple times if it takes a long time to derive the stop information. This is because the operation is performed continuously, and the timing for performing the start drive control is delayed, which may cause inconveniences in the circulation.

  Means 47. In any one of the above means 11 to 46, the stop information deriving means derives the stop information while the stop drive control means is performing stop drive control of the corresponding drive means. Machine.

  According to the means 47, the stop information is derived while the corresponding drive means is under stop drive control, so that it becomes possible to generate the next stop command after one circulating body stops. It is possible to suitably reduce the time lag that can occur.

  Means 48. In any one of the above-mentioned means 11 to 47, a first process execution means that starts when the power is turned on and repeats a series of first processes, and periodically interrupts the process by the first process execution means, A second process execution means for performing a second process, wherein the first process execution means includes the stop information deriving means, and the second process execution means includes the stop drive control means. .

  According to the means 48, the stop information is derived in the first process that is started and repeated when the power is turned on, and the drive means in the second process that is periodically interrupted and performed in the first process. Stop drive control is performed. By adopting such a configuration, it is possible to suitably reduce the time lag that may occur after one circulating body stops and before the next stop command can be generated. It is also possible to derive stop information while smoothly stopping the corresponding rotating body. If the stop drive control of the driving means is performed in the first process and the stop information is derived in the second process, the second process is repeated a plurality of times if it takes a long time to derive the stop information. This is because the timing of performing the stop drive control is delayed, and a problem such as a stop of the stop section area deviating from the specified position may occur.

  Means 49. In any one of the above means 11 to 48, the stop drive control means drives the drive means to stop so that the corresponding rotating body stops until a predetermined specified period elapses after the stop command is generated. The gaming machine is characterized in that the stop information derivation means terminates the derivation of the stop information during the specified period.

  According to the means 49, the corresponding orbiting body stops and the derivation of the stop information is completed before the lapse of the specified period after the stop command is generated. By setting it as this structure, it becomes possible to use effectively the regulation period defined as a period for stopping a circuit body.

  Means 50. The gaming machine according to claim 49, further comprising an invalidating means for invalidating an operation of the stop operating means until at least the specified period elapses after the stop command is generated.

  According to the means 50, the operation of the stop operation means is invalidated at least until the specified period elapses after the stop command is generated. By adopting such a configuration, the timing at which the next stop command can be generated can be made uniform regardless of the time required from when the stop command is generated until the corresponding circulating body stops. it can. Therefore, the timing at which the next stop command can be generated depends on the time required for deriving the stop information, and it is possible to avoid the problem that the player feels uncomfortable.

  Means 51. The game machine according to any one of the means 11 to 50, wherein the stop information storage means is configured in units of bytes in association with each partition area of each of the circulating bodies.

  According to the means 51, the stop information storage means is configured in units of bytes in correspondence with the respective partitioned areas of each circulating body. For this reason, when the stop information of the reachable partition area and the reachable partition area is compared and determined, each stop information may be compared and determined in units of bytes, and the processing configuration can be simplified.

  Means 52. In any one of the above means 11 to 51, the stop partition area deriving means determines that the determination result of the comparison determination means is not different in all stop information of the reachable partition area and the reachable partition area In the case of the game machine, the reaching section area is derived as the stop section area.

  According to the means 52, when there is no difference in all stop information of the reachable partition area and the reachable partition area, the reachable partition area is derived as the stop partition area. By applying the configuration of each of the above means to such a configuration, it becomes possible to reduce the chance that no difference occurs in all stop information of the reachable partition area and the reachable partition area, and the corresponding laps after the stop command is generated It can suppress that the stop mode until a body stops is monotonous.

  Means 53. In any one of the means 11 to 52, the stop information deriving means is a processing program stored in a read-only first storage device, and the stop information storage means is provided in a readable / writable second storage device. A game machine characterized by being a storage area.

  According to the means 53, the processing program for deriving the stop information is stored in the read-only first storage device, and the storage area for storing the stop information is provided in the readable / writable second storage device. With this configuration, it is possible to reduce the amount of data stored in the first storage device for stop control. As a result, for example, data relating to game play can be stored in the first storage device to diversify game play.

Means 54. A plurality of circling bodies that circulate in the circumferential direction and that are provided with a plurality of kinds of patterns in the circumferential direction;
A display window that allows a part of the design to be visually recognized with respect to each orbiting body,
Start operation means operated to start the circulation of each of the circulating bodies;
Lottery means for performing a lottery of a role based on the operation of the start operation means;
A driving means provided for each of the rotating bodies, and for rotating each of the rotating bodies;
Start drive control means for starting and controlling the drive means so as to start the circulation of the revolving bodies based on the operation of the start operation means;
A plurality of stop operation means operated to individually stop the lap of each of the lap members;
Based on the operation of each of the stop operation means, if the corresponding orbiting body is stopped, and if the winning combination lottery is won and the stop operation means is operated at a predetermined timing, the winning combination is won. Stop drive control means for stopping and controlling each of the drive means so that the winning pattern corresponding to the winning role stops at an effective position visible from the display window;
In the gaming machine provided with a privilege granting means for granting a privilege as a winning establishment, when the winning design stops at the effective position forming a predetermined combination,
A correspondence storage means for storing a correspondence relationship between a plurality of partition regions each partitioning each of the circulating bodies in the circumferential direction, and a pattern attached to each partition region;
When the stop operation means is operated and a stop command is generated, a reaching section area grasping means for grasping a reaching section area that has reached a predetermined specified position among each section area of the corresponding circulating body,
When the stop command is generated, based on the grasping result of the reaching compartment area grasping means, stop compartment area determining means for deciding a stop compartment area to be stopped at the specified position among the respective compartment areas of the corresponding circulating body; ,
Stop information deriving means for deriving stop information to be used when stopping a circulating body for which the stop partition area has not been determined, based on a determination result of the stop partition area determining means;
Comprising stop information storage means for storing the stop information,
The stop drive control means performs stop drive control of the corresponding drive means so that the stop partition area determined by the stop partition area determination means stops at the specified position,
The stop information deriving means includes
Based on the determination result of the stop partition area determination means, the stop information of all the partition areas is obtained with respect to the circulating body in which the stop partition area is not determined from when the stop command is generated until the next stop command is generated. Derived for each compartment area,
Reaching picture grasping means for grasping, for each partition area, a reaching pattern that reaches the effective position when the partitioned area reaches the specified position;
Based on the lottery result of the winning combination, it is determined for each divided area whether or not the reaching symbol grasped by the reaching symbol grasping means is to be stopped at the effective position, and the winning lottery is won. An avoidance judging means for judging that the reaching pattern is avoided from stopping at the effective position when a winning corresponding to an unacceptable combination is established;
The stop information storage means is provided with an avoidance determination storage area for storing avoidance determination information indicating the determination result of the avoidance determination means,
The stop section area determining means is
When a stop command is generated after the stop information deriving means derives the stop information, an arrival that can reach the specified position within a predetermined specified period based on the grasping result of the reaching section area grasping means Reachable partition area grasping means for grasping the possible partition area;
Comparison determination means for comparing and determining all the stop information of the reachable partition area and the reachable partition area stored in the stop information storage means,
A gaming machine comprising: a stop partition area deriving unit that derives the stop partition area based on a determination result of the comparison determination unit.

  According to the means 54, each circling body is partitioned into a plurality of partitioned areas, and a correspondence relationship with the pattern attached to each partitioned area is stored. Then, when a stop command is generated, after the reaching partition area that has reached the predetermined specified position is grasped and the stop partition area to be stopped at this specified position is determined among the respective partition areas of the corresponding circulating body Circumstance stop control is performed. In addition, for a circling body for which no stop partition area has been determined, the stop partition area determined by the generation of the previous stop command and the partition area after the stop command is generated and before the next stop command is generated Stop information of all the divided areas is derived based on the reaching pattern that reaches the effective position when the specified position is reached, and the stop information is stored in the stop information storage means. By adopting such a configuration, when the next stop command is generated, it becomes possible to perform the stop control of the corresponding circulating body using the stop information stored in the stop information storage means, and the stop command is generated. Sometimes, a stop table that can derive the relationship between the pattern that has reached the effective position and the pattern that is actually stopped at the effective position becomes unnecessary. Therefore, it is possible to reduce the amount of data stored in advance regarding the stop control of each circuit body.

  In addition, in order to derive stop information of all the partition areas based on the stop partition area determined by the generation of the previous stop command, it is possible to change the stop result of the circulating body to be subsequently stopped according to the determination result of the stop partition area. It becomes possible, and it becomes possible to diversify the stop appearance.

  In addition, in order to derive stop information of all the partition areas for the circulating body for which the stop partition area has not been determined until the next stop command is issued, stop while any of the partition areas has reached the specified position. Even if the command is generated, the stop partition area can be determined using the stop information stored in the stop information storage means. That is, the stop section area can be determined relatively easily regardless of the operation timing of the stop operation means.

  In particular, in a gaming machine having three or more orbiting bodies, a situation occurs in which a plurality of orbiting bodies orbits after the stop section area is determined, but when a stop command corresponding to any of the orbiting bodies occurs. Even if it exists, a stop partition area | region can be determined using the stop information memorize | stored in the stop information storage means. That is, the stop section area can be determined relatively easily regardless of the operation order of the stop operation means.

  Furthermore, by deriving the stop information including the determination result as to whether or not the reaching pattern is to be stopped at the effective position, it is not necessary to make the determination after the stop command is generated. Therefore, while it is possible to derive the stop section area in a relatively short time, it is possible to win a prize despite having not won the lottery of the role, or it corresponds to the role won in the lottery of the role It is possible to avoid the occurrence of a problem that a winning is not established.

  As a result of the above, it is possible to reduce the processing time required for deriving the stop partition area while avoiding an increase in storage capacity by suppressing an increase in the amount of data related to the stop control of each orbiting body It becomes.

  Furthermore, when a stop command is generated after deriving the stop information, all stop information of the reachable partition area and the reachable partition area is compared and determined, and the stop partition area is derived based on the determination result. By adopting such a configuration, it is possible to derive an optimum partitioned area as a stopped partitioned area among the partitioned areas that can reach the specified position before the specified period elapses after the stop command is generated. That is, it is possible to stop the optimum pattern among the patterns that can reach the effective position at the effective position. Therefore, it is possible to diversify the stop appearance.

  Note that any one of the above means 12 to 53 may be applied to this means, and in such a case, a synergistic effect can be expected.

  As a gaming machine to which each of the above-mentioned means can be applied, “a picture row composed of a plurality of designs (specifically, a reel with a design) is displayed in a variable manner (specifically, a reel is rotated). A variable display means (specifically a reel unit) for final stop display is provided, and the change of the pattern is started due to the operation of the start operation means (specifically the start lever), and the stop operation means (specifically Benefits such as the occurrence of special gaming conditions (bonus games, etc.) that are advantageous to the player when the change in the picture is stopped due to the operation of the stop button) and the final stop picture at that time is a specific picture In addition, a ball receiving tray (such as an upper plate) is provided, and a charging device that performs a loading process for taking in the game ball from the ball tray, and a paying device that pays out the game ball to the ball tray, A game ball is thrown in by the throwing device. Gaming machine operation is configured such that the effective of the starting operation means. "Such that the slot machines and pachinko machines can also be mentioned, such as fused type gaming machine by.

(First embodiment)
Hereinafter, a first embodiment when applied to a swivel type gaming machine, which is a kind of gaming machine, specifically, a slot machine will be described in detail with reference to the drawings. 1 is a front view of the slot machine 10, FIG. 2 is a perspective view of the slot machine 10, FIG. 3 is a perspective view of the slot machine 10 with the front door 12 opened, FIG. 4 is a rear view of the front door 12, and FIG. FIG. 3 is a front view of the housing 11.

  As shown in FIGS. 1 to 5, the slot machine 10 includes a housing 11 that forms an outer shell thereof. The casing 11 includes a top plate 11a, a bottom plate 11b, a back plate 11c, a left plate 11d, and a right plate 11e formed in a wooden plate shape, and the adjacent plates 11a to 11e are fixed by a fixing means such as an adhesive. As a whole, it is formed in a box shape with the front surface opened. In addition, each board 11a-11e may be comprised with a synthetic resin panel or a metal panel other than being comprised with a wooden panel, or it is comprised by forming in the box shape integral with a synthetic resin material or a metal material. May be. The casing 11 configured as described above is attached by, for example, driving nails against a so-called island facility at the time of installation in the game hall.

  A front door 12 as a front open / close door is attached to the front side of the housing 11 so as to be openable and closable. That is, the left side plate 11d of the housing 11 is provided with a pair of upper and lower support shafts 25a and 25b. Each of the support shafts 25a and 25b includes a tapered shaft portion that protrudes upward. On the other hand, the front door 12 is provided with support fittings 26a and 26b having insertion holes into which the shaft portions of the support shafts 25a and 25b are inserted corresponding to the support shafts 25a and 25b. Then, the support brackets 26a and 26b are arranged above the support shafts 25a and 25b, and the front door 12 is lowered, whereby the shaft portions of the support shafts 25a and 25b are inserted into the insertion holes of the support brackets 26a and 26b. It is assumed that it was done. Thereby, the front door 12 is supported so as to be rotatable about an opening / closing axis extending in the vertical direction connecting the both support shafts 25a and 25b with respect to the housing 11, and the front opening side of the housing 11 is opened by the rotation. It can be closed or closed.

  The front door 12 is brought into a locked state that cannot be opened by a locking device provided on the rear surface. Further, a key cylinder 20 serving as an unlocking operation unit is provided at the upper right side of the front door 12. The key cylinder 20 is integrated with a locking device, and is configured such that the locked state is released by a predetermined key operation on the key cylinder 20. Therefore, an outline of the lock mechanism including the locking device will be described.

  On the right end side of the front door 12, that is, on the opposite side of the opening / closing axis of the front door 12, a locking device is provided on the back surface. The locking device extends vertically and is fixed to the front door 12, a key cylinder 20 provided so as to extend from the upper part of the base frame to the front of the front door 12, and moves vertically with respect to the base frame. It is provided with a long interlocking rod 21 assembled as possible. And only the key cylinder 20 is provided in the state which protruded ahead of the front door 12 among the locking devices. The interlocking rod 21 is moved downward by operating the key inserted into the key cylinder 20 clockwise. The interlocking saddle 21 is provided with a pair of upper and lower saddle fittings 22 having a bowl shape. When the front door 12 is closed with respect to the casing 11, the saddle fitting 22 is supported on the casing 11 side. Is locked. In addition, the urging member 22 is provided with an urging member such as a coil spring for urging to the side maintaining the locked state. When the key is operated clockwise with respect to the key cylinder 20, the interlocking rod 21 moves downward, and the saddle fitting 22 is moved against the biasing force of the biasing member. The locked state with the support fitting 23 is released, and the locked state of the front door 12 with respect to the housing 11 is released.

  A game panel 30 for notifying the player of the game state is provided above the center of the front door 12. In the game panel 30, three vertically long display windows 31L, 31M, 31R are formed side by side. The display windows 31L, 31M, 31R are made of a transparent or translucent material, and the inside of the slot machine 10 is visible through the display windows 31L, 31M, 31R. The display windows 31L, 31M, and 31R may be combined into a single display window.

  As shown in FIG. 3, the inside of the housing 11 is vertically divided into two by a partition plate 40, and a reel unit 41 constituting variable display means is attached to the upper portion of the partition plate 40. The reel unit 41 includes a left reel 42L, a middle reel 42M, and a right reel 42R as circular bodies formed in a cylindrical shape (annular shape). The reels 42L, 42M, and 42R may be configured as at least an endless belt, and are not limited to a cylindrical shape (annular shape). Each of the reels 42L, 42M, and 42R is rotatably supported so that the central axis thereof is the rotation axis of the reel. The rotation axes of the reels 42L, 42M, and 42R are arranged on the same axis extending in the substantially horizontal direction, and the reels 42L, 42M, and 42R correspond to the display windows 31L, 31M, and 31R on a one-to-one basis. . Accordingly, a part of the surface of each reel 42L, 42M, 42R is visible through the corresponding display windows 31L, 31M, 31R. Further, when the reels 42L, 42M, and 42R are rotated forward, the surfaces of the reels 42L, 42M, and 42R are projected as if moving from top to bottom through the display windows 31L, 31M, and 31R.

  FIG. 6 is an assembled perspective view of the left reel 42L. As shown in the figure, each of these reels 42L, 42M, and 42R is connected to stepping motors 61L, 61M, and 61R as driving means (only the stepping motor 61L for the left reel is shown in FIG. 6). Each of the reels 42L, 42M, and 42R can be rotated individually by driving the stepping motors 61L, 61M, and 61R, that is, independently of each other.

  The left reel 42L includes a cylindrical skeleton member 50 that forms a cylindrical cage, and a belt-like belt wound endlessly on the outer peripheral surface thereof. And it is affixed on the cylindrical skeleton member 50 through a pair of seal parts formed along the both sides of the long side of the belt so as to maintain the wound state. A large number of symbols as identification information are printed at equal intervals on the outer peripheral surface of the belt. A boss 51 is formed at the center of the cylindrical skeleton member 50, and is attached to the drive shaft of the left reel stepping motor 61L via a disk-like boss reinforcing plate 52. Accordingly, when the drive shaft of the left reel stepping motor 61L is rotated, the cylindrical skeleton member 50 is rotated around the drive shaft so that the left reel 42L circulates along the annular reel surface. It has become.

  The left reel stepping motor 61L is fixed to the side surface of the motor plate 53 arranged in an upright state in the reel unit 41 (FIG. 3) with screws 54. The motor plate 53 is provided with a reel index sensor (rotational position detection sensor) 55 in which a light emitting element 55a and a light receiving element 55b are held at a predetermined interval. On the other hand, the base end portion 56b of the sensor cut bun 56 extending in the radial direction is fixed to the boss reinforcing plate 52 integrated with the left reel 42L with a screw 57. The front end portion 56a of the sensor cut bun 56 is bent at a substantially right angle and is positioned so as to pass between both elements 55a and 55b of the reel index sensor 55. Each time the left reel 42L makes one rotation, the reel index sensor 55 detects the passage of the front end portion 56a of the sensor cut bun 56, and a detection signal is output to the main controller 131 described later each time the detection is made. Therefore, main controller 131 can confirm and correct the angular position of left reel 42L for each rotation based on this detection signal.

  The stepping motor 61L is set to rotate once by giving, for example, a drive signal of 504 pulses (also referred to as an excitation signal or an excitation pulse; the same applies hereinafter), and the rotation position of the stepping motor 61L, that is, left The rotational position of the reel 42L is controlled.

  On each belt of each of the reels 42L, 42M, and 42R, a plurality of, specifically, 21 symbols are drawn in the long side direction (circumferential direction). With regard to such a configuration, it can be said that each belt of each reel 42L, 42M, 42R is partitioned into 21 areas, and one symbol is drawn for each of the partitioned areas. In this configuration, 24 pulses (= 504 pulses / 21 symbols) are required to switch the symbol at a predetermined position to the next symbol. Based on the number of pulses from when the detection signal of the reel index sensor 55 is output, it is recognized which symbols are visible from the display windows 31L, 31M, and 31R, and arbitrary symbols are displayed on the display window. Control to make it visible from 31L, 31M, 31R can be performed.

  Of the symbols attached to the reels 42L, 42M, and 42R, the number of symbols that can be visually recognized through the display windows 31L, 31M, and 31R is mainly determined by the vertical lengths of the display windows 31L, 31M, and 31R. Is limited to a predetermined number. In this embodiment, three reels are provided. In other words, it can be said that the display windows 31L, 31M, and 31R are formed so that the three symbols of the upper, middle, and lower stages are visible. For this reason, when all the reels 42L, 42M, and 42R are stopped, 3 × 3 = 9 symbols are visible to the player.

  Here, the symbols attached to the reels 42L, 42M, and 42R will be described. FIG. 7 shows a symbol arrangement drawn on the belt wound around each of the left reel 42L, the middle reel 42M, and the right reel 42R. As shown in the figure, each of the reels 42L, 42M, and 42R is provided with 21 symbols in a row. In addition, numbers 0 to 20 are assigned to the reels 42L, 42M, and 42R, and these numbers are used for the main controller 131 to recognize the symbols that are visible from the display window. It is a number and is not actually attached to the reels 42L, 42M, 42R. However, in the following description, the number is used for explanation.

  The symbols include “bell” symbol (for example, left belt 20th), “red 7” symbol (for example, left belt 18th), “replay” symbol (for example, left belt 17th), “watermelon” symbol (for example, , Left belt 16th), “Lucky” design (eg left belt 13th), “Cherry” design (eg left belt 11th), “Youth” design (eg left belt 10th), “White 7” There are 8 types of symbols (for example, the second left belt). As shown in FIG. 7, the number of various symbols and the arrangement order are completely different in the belt wound around each reel 42L, 42M, 42R.

  Each reel 42L, 42M, 42R of the reel unit 41 is an example of variable display means for variably displaying identification information, and constitutes a main display unit. However, the variable display means may have a configuration other than this as long as the symbol is variably displayed in the circumferential direction. For example, other mechanical reel configurations such as a type in which the belt is rotated instead of rotating may be used. In addition to the mechanical reel configuration, an electric display such as a liquid crystal display or a dot matrix display may be used. A device for variably displaying the identification information may be provided, and in this case, it is possible to give abundant variations in the display form.

  As described above, when all the reels 42L, 42M, and 42R are stopped, 3 × 3 = 9 symbols are visible to the player. In such a configuration, a plurality of main lines ML1 to ML4 and one subline SL1 are set as symbol combination lines. The main lines ML1 to ML4 and the subline SL1 will be described with reference to FIG.

  The main lines ML1 to ML4 are a first main line ML1 in the downward-rightward direction connecting the “upper symbol of the left reel 42L, the intermediate symbol of the middle reel 42M, and the lower symbol of the right reel 42R” (hereinafter referred to as “lower-right line”). 2), the second horizontal main line ML2 (hereinafter referred to as the “upper line”) in the upper horizontal direction connecting the upper symbol of the left reel 42L, the upper symbol of the middle reel 42M, and the upper symbol of the right reel 42R. And the third main line ML3 in the lower horizontal direction connecting the “lower symbol of the left reel 42L, the lower symbol of the middle reel 42M, the lower symbol of the right reel 42R” (hereinafter also referred to as “lower line”). And the fourth main line ML4 in the right upward direction connecting the "lower symbol of the left reel 42L, the intermediate symbol of the middle reel 42M, and the upper symbol of the right reel 42R" (hereinafter "right upward label"). Consisting also referred to) and emissions ". Each of these main lines ML1 to ML4 is validated based on the insertion of medals described later. Then, when a predetermined symbol or a combination of predetermined symbols is stopped on the activated main lines ML1 to ML4 (hereinafter also referred to as effective lines), a winning is awarded, and a predetermined medal number payout process or special A transition process to a bonus game such as a BB game as a gaming state is executed.

  On the other hand, the subline SL1 is set as a line in the middle horizontal direction connecting “the middle symbol of the left reel 42L, the middle symbol of the middle reel 42M, and the middle symbol of the right reel 42R”. The subline SL1 (hereinafter also referred to as “medium line”) is not activated even if a medal is inserted, and even if the predetermined symbol or a combination of predetermined symbols stops on the subline SL1, the above payout No processing or the above migration processing is performed. That is, the subline SL1 is an irrelevant line regarding the winning determination.

  FIG. 9 shows the predetermined symbols and combinations of the predetermined symbols that are awarded, and the number of medals to be paid out when winning.

  Small prizes for which medals are paid out include a watermelon prize, a bell prize, and a cherry prize. If you stop alongside the “Watermelon” symbol, “Watermelon” symbol, and “Watermelon” symbol from the left on the active line, you will receive 6 water medals as a watermelon prize, and the “Bell” symbol from the left on the active line, “Bell” When the symbol and the “bell” symbol are stopped together, eight medals are paid out as a bell prize. When the “cherry” symbol on the left reel 42L stops on the active line, four medals are paid out as a cherry prize. In other words, when the “Cherry” symbol, any symbol, or any symbol from the left on the active line is stopped along with the symbol, a cherry win is awarded. The symbol to be stopped may be any symbol. Therefore, when the “cherry” symbol stops at the position where the plurality of effective lines of the left reel 42L overlap (specifically, the upper stage or the lower stage), a cherry winning is established on each active line, and the overlapping effective The medal is paid out by multiplying the number of lines. As a result, in this embodiment, eight medals are paid out.

  Further, there is a BB winning as a state transition winning in which the gaming state shifts. When stopped alongside the “Red 7” symbol, “Red 7” symbol, and “Red 7” symbol from the left on the active line, the “White 7” symbol, “White 7” symbol, and “White 7” symbol are aligned. When stopped, or when stopped alongside the “Youth” symbol, “Youth” symbol, and “Youth” symbol, the game state shifts to the BB game where the gaming state is the special gaming state as a BB prize. However, even if the combination of these symbols stops on the active line, the medal payout is not performed. That is, when any combination of the “Red 7” symbol, the “White 7” symbol, or the “Youth” symbol is established on the active line, the game only shifts to the BB game. In other words, it can be said that the “red 7” symbol, the “white 7” symbol, and the “youth” symbol are state transition symbols for shifting the gaming state to the BB game.

  Further, when the “replay” symbol, the “replay” symbol, and the “replay” symbol are stopped along the active line from the left, a replay prize is awarded. When the re-game winning is established, the medal payout and the state transition are not performed, but the player can play the next game without reducing the medals owned and without inserting medals.

  In addition, only when the gaming state is an RB game, which will be described later, when the game is stopped along with the “Replay” symbol, “Replay” symbol, and “Bell” symbol from the left on the active line, 15 JAC prizes will be awarded. Medals are paid out.

  As described above, in the slot machine 10, the combination winning that is established when the predetermined symbols of the reels 42L, 42M, and 42R are stopped on the effective line and the predetermined symbol of the left reel 42L is the effective line. As a winning mode, there is a single winning in which winning is achieved regardless of the result of stopping other reels.

  In other cases, that is, when the “cherry” symbol of the left reel 42L does not stop on the active line and the combination of the symbols described above does not stop on the active line, the medal payout, the transition of the gaming state, etc. Not done at all. In other words, the “lucky” symbol of each reel 42L, 42M, 42R and the “cherry” symbol of the middle reel 42M and the right reel 42R are not involved in any winnings. In other words, it can be said that each of the symbols is a no-benefits symbol unrelated to the privilege given to the player. As described above, each of the reels 42L, 42M, and 42R is provided with a bonus symbol related to a winning such as a “bell” symbol and a non-privileged symbol irrelevant to a winning such as a “lucky” symbol, for example. In the following, a combination of symbols corresponding to each prize is also referred to as a combination of winning symbols.

  On the lower left side of the game panel 30, a start lever 71 is provided that is operated to start rotation of the reels 42L, 42M, and 42R all at once (not necessarily simultaneously). The start lever 71 constitutes start operation means or start operation means operated to start rotation of the reels 42L, 42M, and 42R, that is, to start variable display. The start lever 71 is a lever that is pushed by the hand when the player starts the game, and automatically returns to the original position after the hand is released. When the start lever 71 is operated while a medal is inserted, the reels 42L, 42M, and 42R start to rotate all at once.

  On the right side of the start lever 71, button-like stop switches 72, 73, 74 that are operated to individually stop the rotating reels 42L, 42M, 42R are provided. Each of the stop switches 72, 73, 74 is arranged directly below the display windows 31L, 31M, 31R corresponding to the reels 42L, 42M, 42R to be stopped. That is, when the left stop switch 72 is operated, the rotation of the left reel 42L is stopped. When the middle stop switch 73 is operated, the rotation of the middle reel 42M is stopped and the right stop switch 74 is operated. In this case, the rotation of the right reel 42R is stopped. The stop switches 72, 73, 74 constitute stop operation means operated to stop variable display based on the rotation of the reels 42L, 42M, 42R. Each of the stop switches 72, 73, 74 can be stopped when a predetermined time elapses after the left reel 42L starts rotating, and is stopped by lighting a lamp (not shown) during such a state. It is notified that the operation is possible, and is turned off when the rotation stops.

  On the lower right side of the display windows 31L, 31M, 31R, there is provided a medal slot 75 for inserting a medal as an investment value. The medal slot 75 constitutes an input means for inputting the investment value. If attention is paid to the point that the medal insertion slot 75 is accompanied by an operation of directly inserting a medal by the player, it can be said that the medal insertion slot 75 constitutes a direct input means for directly inputting the investment value.

  The medals inserted from the medal insertion slot 75 are guided to either the storage passage 81 or the discharge passage 82 by the selector 84 as passage switching means provided on the back surface of the front door 12. That is, the selector 84 is provided with a medal path switching solenoid 83, which is set to the discharge path 82 side when the medal path switching solenoid 83 is not excited, and switched to the storage path 81 side when excited. The medal guided to the storage passage 81 is guided to the hopper device 91 housed in the housing 11. On the other hand, the medal guided to the discharge passage 82 is guided to the medal tray 18 from the medal discharge port 17 provided in the lower front portion of the front door 12 and returned to the player.

  A hopper device 91 as a payout means for giving a medal to a player is composed of a storage tank 92 for storing the medal and a payout device 93 for paying out the medal to the player. The payout device 93 rotates a medal payout rotating plate (not shown) to discharge the medal to the opening 94 provided in the central right part of the discharge passage 82 and to the medal tray 18 through the discharge passage 82. To come out. Further, a reserve tank 95 is provided on the right side of the hopper device 91 in order to avoid storing a predetermined amount or more of medals in the storage tank 92. A guide plate 96 for discharging medals from the storage tank 92 to the reserve tank 95 is provided inside the storage tank 92 of the hopper device 91. Therefore, when medals are stored more than the height at which the guide plate 96 is provided, the medals are stored in the reserve tank 95.

  A button-like return switch 76 is provided below the medal slot 75. The return switch 76 is a switch that is pressed when a medal inserted into the medal slot 75 is jammed in the selector 84. When this switch is pressed, the selector 84 is mechanically operated to operate the selector 84. The medals packed in 84 are returned from the medal discharge port 17.

  On the lower left side of the display windows 31L, 31M, 31R, there is provided a button-like first credit insertion switch 77 for inserting three virtual medals credited as investment values at a time. Further, on the left side of the first credit insertion switch 77, a second credit insertion switch 78 and a third credit insertion switch 79 are provided as button switches smaller than the switch 77. The second credit insertion switch 78 is for inserting two credited virtual medals at a time, and the third credit insertion switch 79 is for inserting one virtual medal. Each of the credit insertion switches 77 to 79, together with the medal insertion slot 75, constitutes an input means for inputting an investment value. Further, if the medal insertion slot 75 is accompanied by an operation of directly inserting a medal by the player, each credit insertion switch 77 to 79 is only accompanied by an operation of inserting a virtual medal based on the storage memory. It can also be said that it constitutes an indirect input means for indirectly inputting the investment value.

  A button-like settlement switch 80 is provided on the left side of the start lever 71. That is, the slot machine 10 has a credit function for storing and storing surplus inserted medals up to a predetermined maximum value (for 50 medals) and winning medals as virtual medals. The virtual medal is paid out as an actual medal when the settlement switch 80 is pressed while stored and stored. In this case, if paying attention to the function of paying out the credited virtual medal as an actual medal, it can be said that the checkout switch 80 constitutes a checkout operation means for actually paying out the stored game value.

  Below the display windows 31L, 31M, and 31R of the game panel 30, a credit display unit 35 that displays the number of virtual medals stored and stored, and the remaining number of acquired medals that displays the number of remaining medals that can be acquired before the BB game is over. A display unit 36 and an acquired number display unit 37 for displaying the number of medals acquired at the time of winning are provided. Although these display parts 35-37 are comprised by the 7 segment display, it is naturally possible to substitute by a liquid crystal display etc. FIG.

  Here, a procedure for betting medals will be described. If a medal is inserted from the medal slot 75 at the start of the game, a bet is placed.

  That is, when the first medal is inserted into the medal insertion slot 75, the first main line ML1, the second main line ML2, and the third main line ML3 are activated, and these lines ML1 to ML3 are activated lines. It becomes. When the second and third medals are inserted into the medal slot 75, the remaining fourth main line ML4 is activated, and all four main lines ML1 to ML4 become effective lines. That is, in the slot machine 10, the first to third main lines ML1 to ML3 are validated regardless of the number of medals inserted. In other words, it can be said that the positions of the upper and lower stages of the left reel 42L and the right reel 42R and the upper, middle, and lower stages of the middle reel 42M are validated regardless of the number of medals inserted.

  When four or more medals are inserted into the medal slot 75, the surplus medals exceeding three are stored inside the slot machine if the number of virtual medals stored and stored at that time is less than 50. At the same time, the number of virtual medals on the credit display unit 35 is added and displayed. On the other hand, when the number of virtual medals is 50 or reaches 50, the selector 84 switches from the storage passage 81 to the discharge passage 82, and the surplus medals are returned from the medal discharge port 17 to the medal tray 18. Is done.

  Further, when the stored number is displayed on the credit display unit 35, a virtual medal is inserted even when any of the first to third credit insertion switches 77 to 79 is pressed, and a bet is made. .

  When the third credit insertion switch 79 is pressed, the numerical value displayed on the credit display unit 35 is subtracted as one virtual medal is inserted, and the first main line ML1 and the second main line are subtracted. ML2 and the third main line ML3 are effective lines. When the second credit insertion switch 78 is pressed, two numerical values displayed on the credit display unit 35 as two virtual medals are inserted are subtracted, and all main lines ML1 to ML4 are valid lines. It becomes. When the first credit insertion switch 77 is pressed, three numerical values displayed on the credit display unit 35 as three virtual medals are inserted are subtracted, and all the main lines ML1 to ML4 are valid lines. It becomes.

  In addition, when the virtual medal to be inserted when any of the first to third credit insertion switches 77 to 79 is pressed is not stored, for example, when the display of the credit display unit 35 is 2, the first credit For example, when the insertion switch 77 is pressed, all the numerical values in the credit display unit 35 are subtracted to 0, and a bet is placed for the virtual medal that can be inserted.

  On the upper part of the front door 12, there are an upper lamp 13 that lights up or flashes as the game progresses, and a pair of left and right sounds that make various sound effects as the game progresses and inform the player of the game state Speaker 14 and an auxiliary display unit 15 for giving various information to the player. In the present embodiment, the auxiliary display unit 15 is configured by a liquid crystal display for the purpose of diversifying display contents and increasing the display effect. However, other displays such as a dot matrix display may be used. Good. The auxiliary display unit 15 is for executing various display effects as the game progresses, and it can be considered that the game by the reels 42L, 42M, and 42R is caused by the main display unit. This is referred to as an auxiliary display unit 15. On the back surface of the auxiliary display unit 15, an upper lamp 13, a speaker 14, and a display control device 111 for driving the auxiliary display unit 15 are provided. The positions and numbers of the upper lamp 13 and the speakers 14 are not limited to those described above.

  A lower plate 16 on which a model name, a character related to a game, and the like are displayed is mounted above the medal tray 18. In addition, an ashtray 19 that can be reversed to the lower side on the front side is provided on the left side of the medal tray 18.

  A power supply box 121 is provided on the left side of the hopper device 91 inside the housing 11. The power supply box 121 includes a power switch 122, a reset switch 123, a setting key insertion hole 124, and the like. The power switch 122 is a start switch for supplying power to each unit including the main controller 131. The reset switch 123 is a switch for resetting an error state of the slot machine 10. Further, the setting key insertion hole 124 is used by a hole manager or the like to adjust the medal appearance. That is, the hall manager or the like can set the winning probability of the slot machine 10 by inserting the setting key into the setting key insertion hole 124 and turning it ON. The reset switch 123 is operated not only to reset the error state but also to change the winning probability of the slot machine 10.

  A main controller 131 is attached to the back plate 11 c of the housing 11 above the reel unit 41. The main control device 131 includes a CPU that controls the main control, a ROM that stores a game program, a RAM that temporarily stores necessary information according to the progress of the game, a port that communicates with various devices, time counting and synchronization. A main board including a clock circuit and the like used in the case of planning is provided, and the main board is accommodated in a board box as an encapsulating means made of a transparent resin material or the like. The board box includes a substantially rectangular parallelepiped box base and a box cover that covers an opening of the box base. The box base and the box cover are connected to each other so as not to be opened by a sealing unit as a sealing means, whereby the substrate box is sealed. In addition, it is good also as a structure which connects a box base and a box cover so that opening is impossible using a key member.

  Next, the electrical configuration of the slot machine 10 will be described based on the block diagram of FIG.

  The main control device 131 is equipped with a microcomputer centering on a CPU 151 as arithmetic processing means. In addition to the power supply device 161 provided in the power supply box 121, the CPU 151 is connected to a clock circuit 154 that outputs a rectangular wave having a predetermined frequency, an input / output port 155, and the like via an internal bus. The main control device 131 functions as a main base incorporated in the slot machine 10.

  On the input side of the main controller 131, there are a start detection sensor 71a for detecting the operation of the start lever 71, stop detection sensors 72a, 73a, 74a for individually detecting the operations of the stop switches 72, 73, 74, and a medal slot. An inserted medal detection sensor 75a for detecting medals inserted from 75, credit insertion detection sensors 77a, 78a, 79a for individually detecting operations of the respective credit insertion switches 77, 78, 79, and an adjustment for detecting an operation of the adjustment switch 80. Detection sensor 80 a, reel index sensor 55 that individually detects the rotational position (origin position) of each reel 42, payout detection sensor 91 a that detects medals paid out from the hopper device 91, and reset detection sensor that detects the operation of the reset switch 123 123a, set to setting key insertion hole 124 Various sensors such as a setting key detection sensor 124a for detecting that a key is inserted and turned on are connected, and signals from these various sensors are output to the CPU 151 via the input / output port 155. ing.

  Further, a power failure monitoring circuit 161 b provided in the power supply device 161 is connected to the input side of the main control device 131 via the input / output port 155. The power supply device 161 includes a power supply unit 161 a that supplies driving power to the electronic devices of the slot machine 10 including the main control device 131, the power failure monitoring circuit 161 b described above, and the like.

  The power failure monitoring circuit 161b is for monitoring the power-off state and generating a power failure signal not only at the time of power failure but also at the time of power-off by the power switch 122. For this reason, the power failure monitoring circuit 161b monitors the stabilized drive voltage of 12 VDC in this example output from the power supply unit 161a, and determines that the power supply is shut off when the drive voltage drops below, for example, 10 volts. Power outage signal is output. The power failure signal is supplied to each of the CPU 151 and the input / output port 155, and the CPU 151 recognizes this power failure signal and executes a power failure process described later.

  The power supply unit 161a is configured to output a stabilized voltage of 5 volts used as a drive voltage in a control system such as the main control device 131 even when the output voltage is reduced to less than 10 volts. As a time for outputting the stabilization voltage, a time sufficient for executing the power failure process by the main controller 131 is secured.

  On the output side of the main controller 131, a credit display unit 35, a remaining acquired number display unit 36, an acquired number display unit 37, and stepping motors 61 (61L, 61M, 61R) for rotating the reels 42L, 42M, 42R. ), A medal passage switching solenoid 83 provided in the selector 84, a hopper device 91, a display control device 111, an external concentration terminal plate 171 capable of transmitting information to a hall management device (not shown) and the like are connected via an input / output port 155. ing.

  The display control device 111 is a control device for driving the upper lamp 13, the speaker 14, and the auxiliary display unit 15, and includes a substrate in which a CPU, a ROM, a RAM, and the like for driving these are integrated. Then, after receiving a signal from the main control device 131, the display control device 111 independently drives and controls the upper lamp 13, the speaker 14, and the auxiliary display unit 15. Therefore, the display control device 111 is a sub-base that executes auxiliary control in relation to the main control device 131 that is a main base that manages and manages games. In other words, the sub-base is provided for voice, lamp, and display related to indirect games, thereby reducing the burden on the main base. In addition, it is good also as a structure which the display control apparatus 111 controls the various display parts 35-37.

  The CPU 151 described above stores various control programs executed by the CPU 151 and a ROM 152 storing fixed value information, and temporarily stores various information when executing the control program stored in the ROM 152. In addition to the RAM 153 for securing the area, although not shown, various processing circuits necessary for the slot machine 10, such as an interrupt circuit, a timer circuit, an information transmission / reception circuit, etc., as well known, and a credit counter for counting the number of credits Various counters such as are built-in. The ROM 152 and RAM 153 constitute a main memory as storage means.

  The configuration of the ROM 152 will be described with reference to FIG. In the ROM 152, a smooth table storage area 152a, a pull-in bit table storage area 152b, and an offset reference table storage are stored as storage areas for storing various types of information used when performing processing for stopping the reels 42L, 42M, and 42R. An area 152c, a payout number table storage area 152d, a combination correspondence table storage area 152e, a kicking correspondence table storage area 152f, a symbol correspondence table storage area 152g, a mask information storage area 152h, and the like are provided. Details of various types of information stored in these storage areas will be described later. In addition to the above, the ROM 152 has a symbol number “0 to 20” in each reel 42L, 42M, 42R and a region corresponding to each symbol number in the belt of each reel 42L, 42M, 42R. Symbol arrangement information in which a correspondence relationship with a symbol is set is stored. The function storing this correspondence relationship corresponds to the correspondence relationship storage means.

  The configuration of the RAM 153 will be described with reference to FIG. The RAM 153 has a winning combination determination buffer 181, a smooth table address buffer 182, a steady rotation information buffer 183, a stop reel specifying buffer 184, and a stop, which are used when the reels 42 L, 42 M, and 42 R are stopped. Position buffer 185, priority line buffer 186, lead-in bit offset buffer 187, stop completion information buffer 188, priority order information buffer 189, target reel information buffer 190, target symbol buffer 191 and lead-in bit information search Buffer 192, lead-in bit table buffer 196, search line buffer 197, determination completion confirmation buffer 198, establishment determination buffer 199, winning combination type buffer 200, set slip number buffer 201, rewrite line buffer 202, 1 confirmation information buffer 203, a storage area for temporarily storing various kinds of information such as a second confirmation information buffer 204 and the like are provided. Details of these buffers will be described later.

  The RAM 153 is provided with a backup area 205. The backup area 205 is an area for storing the value of the stack pointer when the power is shut down due to the occurrence of a power failure or the like (including power shut down by operating the power switch 122; the same applies hereinafter). When the power failure is resolved (including power-on by operating the power switch 122; the same applies hereinafter), the slot machine 10 can be restored to the state before power-off based on the information in the backup area 205. ing. Writing to the backup area 205 is executed when the power is shut off by the power failure process (see FIG. 15), and restoration of each value written to the backup area 205 is executed in the main process (see FIG. 16) when the power is turned on.

  Next, each control process executed by the CPU 151 in the main controller 131 will be described with reference to the flowcharts in FIGS. The processing of the CPU 151 is roughly divided into a main processing that is started when the power is turned on, a timer interrupt processing that is started periodically (in a cycle of 1.49 msec in the present embodiment), and an NMI terminal (non-maskable terminal). There is an NMI interrupt process activated by receiving a power failure signal. For convenience of explanation, the NMI interrupt process and the timer interrupt process will be described first, and then the main process will be described.

(NMI interrupt processing)
FIG. 13 is a flowchart showing an example of the NMI interrupt process. When the power is shut off due to the occurrence of a power failure or the like, the power failure monitoring circuit 161b of the power supply device 161 generates a power failure signal and transmits it to the main controller 131. In the main controller 131 that has received the power failure signal via the NMI terminal, NMI interrupt processing is executed.

  In the NMI interrupt processing, first, in step S 101, the information on the used registers provided in the CPU 151 is saved in the backup area 205 provided in the RAM 153. Subsequently, in step S102, the power failure information is stored in a power failure information storage area provided in the RAM 153. Thereafter, the information saved in the backup area 205 of the RAM 153 in step S103 is restored to the use register of the CPU 151 again. With this return processing, the NMI interrupt processing ends. If the power failure information can be stored without destroying the information of the used registers of the CPU 151, the saving and restoring processing to the backup area 205 can be omitted.

(Timer interrupt processing)
FIG. 14 is a flowchart of timer interrupt processing that is periodically executed by the main control device 131. The CPU 151 of the main control device 131 generates a timer interrupt, for example, every 1.49 msec.

  First, in the register saving process shown in step S201, the values of all registers in the CPU 151 used in the normal process described later are saved in the backup area 205 of the RAM 153. In step S202, it is confirmed whether or not the power failure information is stored. When the power failure information is stored, the process proceeds to step S203, and a power failure process is executed.

(Processing during power failure)
Here, the power failure process will be described with reference to FIG. Since the power failure process is performed immediately after the register saving process in the timer interrupt process, other interrupt processes can be executed without interruption. Therefore, for example, during the process of transmitting various commands, during the process of reading the switch state (on / off), the process at the time of power failure is not executed by interrupting each process. It is no longer necessary to create a power failure processing program that also takes into account This simplifies the processing program for power failure processing and reduces the program capacity. This also applies to a processing program for power recovery processing described later.

  In step S301, it is determined whether command transmission has been completed. If the transmission has not been completed, the process is terminated and the process returns to the timer interrupt process to terminate the command transmission. In this way, it is determined whether or not the command transmission is completed at the initial stage of the power failure process, the transmission process is prioritized when the transmission is incomplete, and the power failure process is executed after the unit command transmission process is completed. By doing so, it is no longer necessary to construct a power failure processing program that takes into account that power failure processing is executed during command transmission. As a result, the power failure processing program can be simplified and the ROM 152 can be reduced in capacity.

  If step S301 is YES, that is, if the command transmission is completed, the process proceeds to step S302, and the value of the stack pointer of the CPU 151 is stored in the backup area 205 in the RAM 153. Thereafter, in step S303, a RAM determination value, which will be described later, is cleared as a control stop process, and the output state of the output port in the input / output port 155 is cleared, and all actuators not shown are turned off. In step S304, a RAM determination value is calculated and stored in the backup area 205. The RAM determination value is specifically a 2's complement of the checksum at the work area address of the RAM 153. By storing the RAM determination value in the backup area 205, the checksum of the RAM 153 becomes zero. By setting the checksum of the RAM 153 to 0, subsequent RAM access is prohibited in step S305. After that, an infinite loop is entered in preparation for the case where the power supply is completely shut down and processing cannot be executed.

  Returning to the description of the timer interrupt process, if the power failure information is not stored in step S202, various processes after step S204 are performed.

  That is, in step S204, a watchdog timer clearing process for initializing the value of the watchdog timer for monitoring the occurrence of malfunction is performed. In step S205, an interrupt end declaration process is performed to enable the next timer interrupt to be set for the CPU 151 itself. In step S206, in order to rotate the reels 42L, 42M, and 42R, a stepping motor control process for driving the stepping motors 61L to 61R, which are the respective rotary drive motors, is performed. In step S207, the state of various sensors (see FIG. 10) connected to the input / output port 155 is read, and sensor monitoring processing is performed to monitor whether the read result is normal. In step S208, timer calculation processing for subtracting the value of each counter or timer is performed. In step S209, a counter process for outputting the bet number of medals and the result of counting the number of payouts to the external concentration terminal board 171 is performed.

  In step S210, command transmission processing for transmitting various commands to the display control device 111 is performed. In step S211, segment information setting processing for setting segment information displayed on the credit display unit 35, the remaining acquired number display unit 36, and the acquired number display unit 37 is performed. In step S212, the segment information set by the segment information setting process is supplied to the display units 35 to 37, and the segment information display process for displaying the corresponding numbers and symbols is performed. In step S213, port output processing for outputting information corresponding to the I / O device from the input / output port 155 is performed. In step S214, the value of each register saved in the backup area 205 in the previous step S201 is returned to the corresponding register in the CPU 151. Thereafter, in step S215, an interrupt permission process for permitting the next timer interrupt is performed, and this series of timer interrupt processes is terminated.

(Main process)
FIG. 16 is a flowchart showing a main process in the main controller 131 executed after the power is turned on. The main process is executed when the power is turned on by recovery from a power failure or by turning on the power switch 122.

  First, in step S401, as initialization processing, the value of the stack pointer is set in the CPU 151, and an interrupt mode that permits interrupt processing is set. Thereafter, various settings for the register group in the CPU 151, the I / O device, and the like are set. And so on.

  When these initialization processes are completed, in step S402, whether or not the setting key is inserted into the setting key insertion hole 124 and is turned ON, more specifically, whether or not the ON signal is received from the setting key detection sensor 124a. Determine. If the setting key has been turned ON, the process proceeds to step S403, and all information stored in the RAM 153 is cleared as a forced RAM clear process. In subsequent step S404, a winning probability setting process is performed.

(Winning probability setting process)
Here, the winning probability setting process will be described with reference to FIG. The slot machine 10 is prepared in advance with six stages of winning probabilities from “Setting 1” to “Setting 6”, and the winning probability setting process sets which winning probability is used to execute the internal processing. It is a process to do.

  In step S501, it is determined whether or not the setting key is inserted and the ON operation is performed. If the ON operation is not performed, the process is terminated as it is. If it is ON, the next timer interrupt is permitted in step S502. Thereafter, the current set value is read in step S503, and the current set value is displayed on the credit display unit 35 in step S504. However, in the process immediately after the setting key is inserted and turned ON, the information in the RAM 153 is cleared by the previous forced RAM clear process, so the set value displayed on the credit display unit 35 is “1”. is there.

  In step S505, it is determined whether or not the start lever 71 has been operated. If the start lever 71 has not been operated, setting update processing shown in steps S506 to S507 is performed. In step S506, it is determined whether or not the reset switch 123 has been operated. If the reset switch 123 is not operated, the process directly returns to step S504. If the reset switch 123 is operated, the set value is updated by 1 in step S507, and then the process returns to step S504. That is, in the setting update process, every time the reset switch 123 is operated, the setting value is updated by 1, and the updated setting value is displayed on the credit display unit 35. When the reset switch 123 is operated when the set value is “6”, the set value is updated to “1”.

  If the start lever 71 is operated in step S505, it is determined in step S508 whether the setting key is continuously turned on. If the ON operation of the setting key is continued, the process waits as it is. If the ON operation is ended, the next timer interruption is prohibited in step S509. Thereafter, the set value is saved in step S510, information other than the set value stored in the RAM 153 is cleared in step S511, and the process is terminated.

  Returning to the description of the main process, after performing the winning probability setting process in step S404, a normal process for performing main control relating to the game is executed in step S405.

  On the other hand, when the setting key is not inserted in step S402, power recovery processing shown in step S406 and subsequent steps is performed. The power recovery process is a process for returning the state of the slot machine 10 to the state before the power is shut off. Therefore, in the power recovery process, it is necessary to first check whether the information in the RAM 153 is normal.

  Therefore, in step S406, it is determined whether or not the set value is normal. Specifically, when the set value is any one of 1 to 6, it is determined to be normal, and when it is 0 or 7 or more, it is determined to be abnormal. If the set value is normal, it is confirmed in step S407 whether or not the power failure information is stored. If the power failure information is stored, it is further confirmed in step S408 whether or not the RAM determination value is normal. Specifically, the value of the checksum in the RAM 153 is checked to check whether the value is normal, that is, whether the value of the checksum including the RAM determination value is 0. If the checksum value including the RAM determination value is 0, it is determined that the information in the RAM 153 is normal.

  If it is determined in step S408 that the RAM determination value is normal, the process proceeds to step S409, where the stack pointer value stored in the backup area 205 is written to the stack pointer of the CPU 151, and the stack state is set before the power is shut off. Return to the state. Next, in step S <b> 410, a power recovery command that tells execution of power recovery processing is transmitted to the display control device 111. Thereafter, in step S411, the game state is stopped and automatic settlement setting storage processing is performed, and in step S412, various sensors such as the start detection sensor 71a are initialized. After the above processing is completed, the power failure information is cleared in step S413, and the processing returns to the address before turning off the power. Specifically, the process returns to the timer interrupt process described above, and the watchdog timer clear process (step S204) is executed.

  On the other hand, if any of step S406 to step S408 is NO, that is, the setting value is abnormal, the power failure information of the bag set at the time of power-off is not stored, or the RAM determination value is abnormal, There is a high possibility that the information in the RAM 153 has been destroyed. In such a case, the operation prohibiting process shown in steps S414 to S416 is performed. As the operation prohibition process, first, the next timer interrupt process is prohibited in step S414. In step S415, all output ports in the input / output port 155 are cleared, so that all actuators connected to the input / output port 155 are removed. Control to off state. Thereafter, in step S416, an error notification process for notifying the hole manager or the like of the occurrence of an error is performed. This operation prohibition state is maintained until the above-described winning probability setting process is performed.

(Normal processing)
Next, normal processing for performing main control related to the game will be described based on the flowchart of FIG.

  First, in step S601, it is determined whether or not a medal is bet. If a medal is bet, it is determined in step S602 whether the start lever 71 has been operated. If both step S601 and step S602 are YES, a reel rotation process for starting the rotation of the reels 42L, 42M and 42R is executed in step S603 (the function for executing the process is a start drive control means), and step S604. In step S605, a reel stop process for stopping the rotation of the reels 42L, 42M, and 42R is executed (the function for executing the process is a stop drive control unit), and a medal payout process for paying out medals is executed in step S605 (the process) , A bonus game process for executing a bonus game in step S606 is executed, and the process returns to step S601. On the other hand, if no medal is bet in step S601 or the start lever 71 is not operated in step S602, the process returns to step S601.

  Here, in this embodiment, a characteristic configuration is provided for the reel rotation processing in step S603 and the reel stop processing in step S604. In addition, the reel stop process is different in processing manner between when the left reel 42L stops as the first stop and when the other reels 42M and 42R stop. Therefore, in the following description, first, the case where the left reel 42L stops as the first stop will be described, and then the case where the other reels 42M and 42R stop as the first stop will be described. In the following, a case where two or three medals are bet and all the main lines ML1 to ML4 become effective lines will be described. The case where one bet is placed is the same as the case of two bets or three bets except that the effective line to establish a winning is limited, and thus description thereof is basically omitted.

(Reel rotation processing)
The reel rotation processing in step S603 will be described based on the flowchart of FIG. In step S701, a lottery process is executed (the function for executing the process is a lottery means). Here, the lottery process will be described based on the flowchart of FIG.

(Lottery process)
In the lottery process, first, in step S801, a lottery table for determination of success / failure is selected based on the current setting state of the slot machine 10 and the number of bet medals. Here, the setting state of the slot machine 10 is any one of “setting 1” to “setting 6”. When “setting 1”, the lottery table having the lowest BB winning probability is selected, and when “setting 6” is set. The lottery table having the highest BB winning probability is selected. Note that the relationship between the setting state and the lottery table is not limited to this, and the lottery table may be set so that the larger the set value, the higher the expected medal acquisition value.

  The number of medals to bet is any one of 1 to 3, and a lottery table is selected such that the winning probability of winning combination increases as the number of bets increases. For example, the winning probability of a winning combination when three bets are higher than the winning probability of winning when a single bet is three times. The relationship between the number of medals bet and the lottery table is not limited to this, and the lottery table may be set so that the expected medal acquisition value increases as the number of medals bet increases. That's fine.

  The lottery table will be briefly described. FIG. 21 is a lottery table that is selected when three bets are placed under the normal gaming state of “Setting 1”. In the lottery table, the same number of index values IV as the number of winning combinations is set. That is, in the normal gaming state, replay, cherry, cherry and watermelon combined role, watermelon, bell, BB based on the “Red 7” symbol (hereinafter referred to as 1BB), BB based on the “White 7” symbol (hereinafter referred to as “Right”) Since eight types of winnings of the second BB) and the BB based on the “youth” symbol (hereinafter, the third BB) can occur, eight index values IV of 1 to 8 are set. Each index value IV is uniquely associated with a winning combination, and a point value PV is set. In each lottery table in the slot machine 10, a lottery table with a higher setting value has a larger point value PV corresponding to each BB combination, and a lottery table with a larger number of bets has a larger point value PV. ing.

  In step S802, the index value IV is set to 1, and in the subsequent step S803, a determination value DV used for determining whether or not the winning combination is determined is set. In the determination value setting process, a new determination value DV is set by adding a point value PV corresponding to the current index value IV to the current determination value DV. In the first determination value setting process, the random value latched by the random number counter when the start lever 71 is operated is set as the current determination value DV, and this random value corresponds to the current index value IV “1”. The point value PV to be added is added to obtain a new determination value DV. Here, the random number counter will be briefly described. In the slot machine 10, a random number of “0 to 65535” is generated using two 8-bit shift registers. Each shift register is updated by “1” periodically (for example, every 100 ns), and a value obtained by exchanging the upper and lower bits of each shift register is input to the CPU 151 and the start lever 71 is operated (that is, start detection) The value input when the sensor 71a ON signal is received is latched as a random value. This is a device for making the random value used in the initial determination value setting process irregular. For example, a value obtained by randomly replacing the bits of each shift register is latched as a random value. Also good.

  Thereafter, in step S804, it is determined whether or not the combination corresponding to the index value IV is correct. In the determination of whether or not a winning combination is made, it is determined whether or not the determination value DV exceeds “65535”. This processing is terminated after the winning combination determination buffer 181 is stored. Here, the winning combination determination buffer 181 is configured in units of bytes, and stores “00000000” as an initial value. In step S805, the combination information corresponding to the winning combination in the current lottery process is stored in the winning combination determination buffer 181 as winning information in the combination corresponding information (FIG. 40) described later. The winning combination determination buffer 181 is composed of 2 bytes or more so that a plurality of winning information can be stored simultaneously.

  Incidentally, when the winning information is the small role winning information or the replay winning information, these winning information is cleared to “0” at the end of the game in which the winning information is stored. On the other hand, if the winning information is any of the first BB winning information to the third BB winning information, the BB winning information is cleared to “0” as one of the conditions that the combination of the corresponding BB symbols is established on the active line. Is done. That is, the first to third BB winning information may be valid over a plurality of games. In addition, in the success / failure determination of the winning combination after the next game carrying over the first to third BB winning information, the determination of whether or not the small winning combination or replay is made is performed, but the determination of winning / failing regarding the first to third BB winning combinations is not performed.

  If the determination value DV does not exceed 65535 in step S804, it means that the combination corresponding to the index value IV is lost. In such a case, 1 is added to the index value IV in step S806, and in the subsequent step S807, it is determined whether or not there is a role corresponding to the index value IV, that is, whether or not there is a role to be determined. Specifically, it is determined whether or not the index value IV added by 1 exceeds the maximum value of the index values IV set in the lottery table. If there is no combination that should be determined to be true or false, this process is terminated. If there is a winning combination to be judged, the process returns to step S803 and the winning judgment of the winning combination is continued. At this time, in step S803, the point value PV corresponding to the current index value IV is added to the determination value DV (that is, the current determination value DV) used for determining whether or not the previous winning combination is a new determination value DV. In step S804, whether or not a winning combination is determined based on the determination value DV. Note that the configuration of the lottery process is not limited to adding the determination value DV, and the maximum value (“65535”) may be set to the determination value DV and then subtracted.

  When the lottery table shown in FIG. 21 is selected, each BB winning probability is about 1/900, and the BB winning probability obtained by collecting them is about 1/300. On the other hand, the replay and small role winning probabilities are set higher than the BB winning probability, the replay winning probability is about 7.3, the bell winning probability is about 7.0, and cherry and watermelon In the case of not being a combined role, the winning probability is 1/256, respectively, and the winning probability of the combined role of cherry and watermelon is 1/256.

  Returning to the description of the reel rotation process, after the lottery process is performed in step S701, the slip table acquisition process is executed in step S702. The sliding table is a table in which it is determined how much the reel is slid (rotated) and stopped after the stop switch is pressed. In other words, the slip table is a relationship between the reaching symbol number that has reached the base point position (lower stage in the present embodiment) when the stop switch is pressed and the stop symbol number that actually stops at the base point position. This is a defined stop information group.

  The sliding table is stored in the sliding table storage area 152a of the ROM 152, and is prepared only for the case where the left reel 42L is stopped at the first stop. That is, no sliding table is prepared for the case where the left reel 42L is stopped at the second stop or the third stop, and the sliding table is not provided for the middle reel 42M and the right reel 42R regardless of the stop order. Not prepared. For a stop mode in which no slip table is prepared, priority information as a stop information group is created in each priority information creation process described later.

  The sliding table is set in correspondence with the gaming situation of the slot machine 10, and is further set in correspondence with each winning combination in each gaming situation. The plurality of slide tables are stored in the slide table storage area 152 a of the ROM 152. As for the game situation in detail, as described above, a lottery or re-game lottery may be performed in a state where any of the first to third BB winning information is carried over to the winning combination determination buffer 181. No. 10 is a game situation where none of the first to third BB winning information is stored in the winning combination determination buffer 181, and any of the first to third BB winning information is stored in the winning combination determination buffer 181. Has a BB winning status stored. The BB winning situation corresponds to each BB winning information on a one-to-one basis.

  The configuration relating to the sliding table will be described by taking as an example a case where no other combination is won in the first BB winning situation.

  As shown in FIG. 22, in the slip table, the number of slips is set in a one-to-one correspondence with each of the 21 symbol numbers. When the left stop switch 72 is operated, the number of slips is stopped when the symbol of the reaching symbol number (hereinafter referred to as “reaching symbol”) is stopped as it is (“0” in FIG. 22). In the case of stopping after sliding by one symbol rather than the case (“1” in FIG. 22), in the case of stopping after sliding by two symbols rather than stopping the arrival symbol as it is (“2” in FIG. 22), When stopping after reaching 3 symbols rather than stopping the reaching symbol as it is (“3” in FIG. 22), stopping after sliding 4 symbols rather than stopping the reaching symbol as it is (FIG. 22). Are prepared as reel stop modes. This is a device for closely associating the timing at which the player operates the left stop switch 72 with the symbol arrangement (hereinafter referred to as “stop appearance”) that stops within the visible range from the left display window 32L. is there. That is, by stopping the left reel 42L from the timing at which the left stop switch 72 is operated until the specified time (190 msec) has elapsed, the player has the impression that the stop appearance has been determined by the player's operation. It is possible to hold it. In addition, by making it possible to slide up to 4 symbols as compared with the case where the reaching symbol is stopped as it is, the so-called oversight that the symbol or symbol combination corresponding to the winning combination does not stop on the effective line occurs. It becomes possible to reduce the frequency, and it is possible to avoid the problem that the combination of winning symbols stops on the active line even though the winning combination is not won.

  A symbol with a slip number of “0” is a symbol that actually stops in the lower stage. For example, when the left stop switch 72 is pressed while the “red 7” symbol, which is the 18th symbol of the left reel 42L, has reached the lower stage, the left reel 42L stops without sliding. In addition, a symbol having a number whose slip number is not “0” means that the reel slides by the number of symbols described as compared to the case where the reaching symbol is stopped as it is. For example, when the left stop switch 72 is pressed while the “Lucky” symbol, which is the 13th symbol of the left reel 42L, has reached the lower stage, the slip number is “3”, so the left reel 42L has three symbols. The “watermelon” symbol, which is the 16th symbol, stops at the lower level, and the “red 7” symbol, which is the 18th symbol, stops at the upper level.

  Even if the slip table is acquired as described above, depending on the timing when the left stop switch 72 is pressed, the “red 7” symbol does not stop on the active line, and the first BB winning is not established. There is also. This is because the range that can be slid is predetermined within 190 msec (maximum of 4 symbols) from the timing when the stop switch is pressed, and from the “red 7” symbol that reached the lower row, the “red” that reaches the next lower row 7 ”because the interval where the interval to the symbol is more than 5 symbols is set.

  Here, the symbol arrangement of each reel 42L, 42M, 42R will be described.

  The “replay” symbol is arranged on each of the reels 42L, 42M, and 42R so that the interval between the symbol that reaches the lower stage first and the symbol that reaches the next is 4 symbols or less. For example, the 12th “replay” symbol and the 17th “replay” symbol of the left reel 42L are arranged so that the interval is 4 symbols, and the 3rd “replay” symbol of the middle reel 42M and 7 The “replay” symbols of the numbers are arranged so that the interval is 3 symbols. As described above, the “replay” symbols are arranged on the reels 42L, 42M, and 42R so that the interval between the symbols of the same type is 4 symbols or less. As described above, the reels 42L, 42M, and 42R can be stopped after sliding up to a maximum of four symbols from the timing when the stop switches 72 to 74 are operated. Therefore, by adopting such a symbol arrangement, the “replay” symbol can be stopped at an arbitrary position when the replay winning is established, regardless of when the stop switches 72 to 74 are pressed at any timing. . For example, if the left stop switch 72 is pressed when the number 12 “replay” symbol of the left reel 42L reaches the lower level, the “replay” symbol can be stopped at the lower level if the left reel 42L is stopped as it is. If the left reel 42L is slid after 3 symbols and then stopped, the 17th “replay” symbol can be stopped in the upper stage, and if the left reel 42L is slid after 4 symbols and stopped, the 17th The “replay” symbol can be stopped in the middle.

  In the slot machine 10, in addition to the “replay” symbols, the “bell” symbols of the middle reel 42 </ b> M and the right reel 42 </ b> R are arranged so that the interval between the symbols of the same kind is 4 symbols or less. For this reason, even if the middle stop switch 73 and the right stop switch 74 are pressed at any timing, the “bell” symbol can be stopped at an arbitrary position when the bell winning is established.

  On the other hand, in the “bell” symbol of the left reel 42L, in addition to the interval in which the interval between the same symbols is 4 symbols or less, the interval in which the interval between the same symbols is 6 symbols larger than 4 symbols is formed. Has been placed. That is, the 15th “bell” design and the 19th “bell” design are separated by 3 designs, the 19th “bell” design and the 20th “bell” design are adjacent, and the 20th “bell” design. The “Bell” design and the 4th “Bell” design are separated by 4 designs, and the 4th “Bell” design and the 8th “Bell” design are separated by 3 designs. On the other hand, the 8th “bell” design and the 15th “bell” design are separated by 6 designs.

  For example, if the left stop switch 72 is pressed when the 9th “replay” symbol reaches the lower stage, the left reel 42L can only slide up to a maximum of 4 symbols. It cannot be stopped at the bottom. However, in the case of the slot machine 10 in which three symbols of the upper, middle and lower stages are visible from the display window 31L and the effective lines are set at the upper and lower positions, the left stop switch 72 is pushed at the above timing. Even so, the 15th “bell” symbol can be stopped on the upper stage, that is, on the active line. In this way, in a slot machine for setting a plurality of effective lines, the interval between similar symbols is “(maximum number of slips on reel) + (number of symbols stopped within the range where effective lines are set) −1” or less. If it arrange | positions so that it may become, it can stop the said same design symbol on any effective line.

  However, if the winning of the bell role is performed and the middle reel 42M or the right reel 42R is stopped before the left reel 42L, there is a possibility that a failure to win a bell will not be achieved despite winning the bell role. Arise. For example, when the “bell” symbol of the middle reel 42M is stopped at the lower level, it is necessary to stop the “bell” symbol of the left reel 42L at the lower level in order to establish a bell winning. However, for example, if the left stop switch 72 is pressed when the “Replay” symbol of No. 9 reaches the lower stage, the left reel 42L is slid by 6 symbols to stop the “Bell” symbol in the lower stage. This is because the “bell” symbol cannot be stopped at the lower stage.

  As described above, when the left stop switch 72 is operated as the first stop command under the winning of the bell, the bell winning can be established regardless of the timing when the stop switches 72 to 74 are pressed. . On the other hand, when the middle stop switch 73 or the right stop switch 74 is operated as the first stop command under the winning of the bell, that is, when an irregular pressing is performed under the winning of the bell, the left stop switch 72 may be missed depending on the operation timing. Can occur.

  In the slot machine 10, in addition to the “bell” symbol, the “watermelon” symbol also has 6 symbols in which the interval between the same symbols is larger than 4 symbols, in addition to the interval in which the interval between the same symbols is 4 or less. Is arranged on the left reel 42L so as to form a section. For this reason, when the left stop switch 72 is operated as the first stop command, the “watermelon” symbol may be stopped on any effective line when establishing a watermelon winning regardless of the operation timing. it can.

  On the other hand, the “Red 7” symbols are only arranged one by one at the 18th position of each of the reels 42L, 42M, 42R. , 42M, 42R. For this reason, for example, if the left stop switch 72 is pressed while the number 0 “watermelon” symbol of the left reel 42L has reached the lower stage, even if the left reel 42L is slid by four symbols, “red 7”. The symbol cannot be stopped on the active line. Therefore, even if the first BB is won, depending on the timing when the stop switches 72 to 74 are pressed, the “red 7” symbol may not stop on the active line, and the first BB winning may not be established. In the slot machine 10, in addition to the “Red 7” symbol, the “White 7” symbol and the “Youth” symbol are arranged on the reels 42L, 42M, and 42R so as to form sections that are separated by five symbols or more. ing. In addition, the “watermelon” symbol is arranged on the middle reel 42M and the right reel 42R so as to form a section separated by five symbols or more. For this reason, when either BB or watermelon is won, the stop switches 72 to 74 are operated so that the symbol corresponding to the winning combination (hereinafter referred to as “winning symbol”) stops on the active line. There is a need to.

  The “cherry” symbols of the left reel 42L, where the winning is achieved by the left reel 42L alone, are arranged at two locations, No. 3 and No. 11. Therefore, it is necessary for the left reel 42L to rotate by eight symbols after the third “cherry” symbol reaches the lower stage until the eleventh “cherry” symbol reaches the lower stage. Similarly, the left reel 42L needs to rotate by 13 symbols from the time when the eleventh “cherry” symbol reaches the lower stage until the time when the third “cherry” symbol reaches the lower stage. However, the left reel 42L can only slide up to a maximum of 4 symbols. Therefore, if the left stop switch 72 is operated at a timing after the “cherry” symbol passes the lower stage, the “cherry” symbol is placed on the effective line. Cannot be stopped. For this reason, when the cherry is won, it is necessary to operate the left stop switch 72 with the aim of stopping the “cherry” symbol on the active line.

  Further, the “cherry” symbol of the left reel 42L is arranged so that it can be viewed from the display window 31L simultaneously with other symbols forming the combined prize. In other words, the “Cherry” symbol of No. 3 has the “White 7” symbol and the “Bell” symbol adjacent to both sides, and the “Replay” symbol at the number 1 position separated by one symbol. Has been. In addition, the “Cherry” symbol of No. 11 has the “Youth” symbol and the “Replay” symbol arranged adjacent to both sides thereof, and the “Replay” symbol is arranged at the No. 9 position separated by one symbol. ing.

  More specifically, the left reel 42L has a simultaneously visible section in which the “replay” symbol stops at another position visible from the display window 31L when the “cherry” symbol stops at the upper, middle, and lower positions. "Cherry" design and "Replay" design are arranged. Specifically, when the “Cherry” symbol stops in the upper row, the “Replay” symbol is placed in the first, which is one symbol separated from the third “Cherry” symbol. In addition, a “Replay” symbol is arranged at No. 9 which is one symbol separated from the No. 11 “Cherry” symbol. In addition, when the “cherry” symbol stops in the middle stage, the “replay” symbol is arranged at the number 12 adjacent to the eleventh “cherry” symbol so that the “replay” symbol stops in the upper stage. In addition, when the “cherry” symbol stops at the lower level, the “replay” symbol is arranged at the number 12 adjacent to the eleventh “cherry” symbol so that the “replay” symbol stops at the middle level. Although details will be described later, in such a symbol arrangement, it is necessary to avoid the formation of a composite winning in which a winning corresponding to a non-winning combination is established in addition to a winning corresponding to the winning combination.

  Returning to the description of the slip table, priority lines and lead-in bit offsets are set in the slip table in a one-to-one correspondence with 21 symbols. Each information of the priority line and the lead-in bit offset is acquired in the first stop sliding number acquisition process described later, and used when creating priority information as a stop information group in each priority information generation process described later. The This will be described later.

  In the slip table acquisition process of step S702, by referring to the information stored in the winning combination determination buffer 181 of the RAM 153, it is determined whether or not the gaming situation in the current game and the winning combination such as a small combination or re-playing are won, The address of the slip table corresponding to the determination result is acquired from the slip table storage area 152 a of the ROM 152. The acquired address is stored in the smooth table address buffer 182 of the RAM 153. Thereafter, in step S703, start interrupt processing is permitted.

(Start interrupt processing)
The starting interrupt process will be described with reference to the flowchart of FIG. The start interrupt process is a part of the stepping motor control process in step S206 in the timer interrupt process (FIG. 14) described above. Then, by executing the processing of step S703 in the reel rotation processing, start interrupt processing is executed as part of a series of processing in the stepping motor control processing. As described above, since the timer interrupt process is started at a cycle of 1.49 msec, the start interrupt process is also started at a cycle of about 1.49 msec while the start interrupt process is permitted.

  In the start interrupt process, first, in step S901, it is determined whether steady rotation information is stored in the steady rotation information buffer 183 of the RAM 153. If the steady rotation information is stored, it means that the acceleration process has already been completed, so the start interrupt process is terminated as it is. If steady rotation information is not stored, it is determined in step S902 whether acceleration processing is in progress. If the acceleration process is being performed, the process proceeds to step S905.

  If acceleration processing is not in progress, it is determined in step S903 whether the wait time has elapsed. The wait time is a time set for waiting until a predetermined time (for example, 4.1 seconds) elapses from the time when the reel starts rotating in the previous game. If the wait time has not elapsed, the start interrupt process is terminated as it is. Thereby, even if the player bets medals and operates the start lever 71, the reels 42L, 42M, and 42R may not immediately start rotating. If the wait time has elapsed, the process proceeds to step S905 after starting the acceleration process in step S904. Thereby, rotation of each reel 42L, 42M, 42R is started. Note that the process of determining the elapse of the wait time in step S903 may be performed between step S702 and step S703 in the reel rotation process.

  In step S905, it is determined whether or not the acceleration process has been completed and each of the reels 42L, 42M, and 42R has made steady rotation. If the engine is not in a steady rotation, the start interrupt process is terminated as it is. If the engine is in a steady rotation, the start interrupt is stored after the steady rotation information is stored in the steady rotation information buffer 183 of the RAM 153 in step S906. The process ends.

  Returning to the description of the reel rotation process, after permitting the start interrupt process in step S703, the irregular push priority information creating process is executed in step S704. The irregular pushing priority order information creation process is a process for creating a stop information group in advance for each of the reels 42M and 42R assuming that the middle reel 42M or the right reel 42R is stopped at the time of the first stop. It is. The irregular pressing priority order information generation process will be described together with the description of the normal process when the reels 42M and 42R other than the left reel 42L are operated to stop as the first stop, and the description is omitted here. .

  In a succeeding step S705, it is determined whether or not the steady rotation information is stored in the steady rotation information buffer 183. If steady rotation information is stored, the process proceeds to step S706. If the steady rotation information is not stored, the process waits in step S705 until each reel 42L, 42M, 42R has a steady rotation. Thereafter, the steady rotation information is stored in the start interrupt process, so that an affirmative determination is made in step S705 and the process proceeds to step S706. In step S <b> 706, start interrupt processing is prohibited, and steady rotation information is cleared from the steady rotation information buffer 183 of the RAM 153. Thereafter, the reel rotation process is terminated.

(Reel stop processing)
Next, the reel stop process in step S604 will be described based on the flowchart of FIG. In step S1001, it is determined whether or not any of the stop switches 72 to 74 is operated to generate a reel stop command, and more specifically whether or not an ON signal is received from the stop detection sensors 72a to 74a. If no stop command is generated, the system waits until a stop command is generated. Here, in the present embodiment, a period from the start of rotation of each reel 42L, 42M, 42R until steady rotation at a predetermined speed is set as an invalid period, and the stop switch 72 is set within this invalid period. Even if .about.74 are operated, the ON signals from the stop detection sensors 72a to 74a are invalidated.

  Subsequently, in step S1002, it is determined whether or not the current stop command is the first stop command, that is, whether or not the stop switches 72 to 74 are pressed when all three reels are rotating. If it is the first stop command, the process proceeds to step S1003 to execute the first stop process. If it is not the first stop command, it is determined in step S1004 whether or not the current stop command is the second stop command, that is, when one of the three reels 42L, 42M, and 42R is stopped and two are rotating. It is determined whether or not the stop switch has been pressed. If it is the second stop command, the process proceeds to step S1005 to execute the second stop process. If it is not the second stop command, the process proceeds to step S1006 to execute a third stop process.

  After these first to third stop processes, it is determined in step S1007 whether or not the rotation of all the reels 42L, 42M, 42R has been stopped. If the rotation of all the reels 42L, 42M, and 42R has not stopped, the process returns to step S1001, and if the rotation has stopped, the payout determination process is performed in the subsequent step S1008, and the reel stop process ends. .

  In the payout determination process, it is determined whether or not a symbol or a combination of symbols corresponding to the winning combination is established on the active line. When it has been established, the winning combination determination buffer 181 is referred to determine whether or not the combination matches the winning combination. If not, the upper lamp 13 or the like is used. An error is displayed and the payout amount storage area is cleared to “0”. If they match, it means that the winning combination is a winning combination and the winning combination is won, so the number of payouts corresponding to the winning combination is stored in the payout number storage area. In the payout determination process, it is determined whether or not a symbol or a combination of symbols corresponding to the role that is the subject of the lottery is established on the active line using the symbol correspondence information and the role correspondence information described later. To do.

  Here, in the slot machine 10, the second stop operation is validated until a predetermined first valid waiting period (for example, 200 msec) elapses after the first stop command is generated based on the first stop operation. No second stop command is generated. And the processing time is set so that the 1st stop process mentioned later may be complete | finished within this 1st effective waiting period. Similarly, the third stop operation is not validated until a predetermined second effective waiting period (for example, 200 msec) elapses after the second stop command is generated based on the second stop operation. The third stop command is not generated. Then, the processing time is set so that the second stop process to be described later ends within the second effective waiting period. By setting the first and second effective standby periods in this way, it is not necessary to start the deceleration process for the next reel before the reel stop corresponding to the stop command is completed. For example, assuming that it is necessary to start the deceleration process for the next reel before the stop of the reel corresponding to the stop command is completed, it becomes necessary to perform the stop process for two reels in parallel, and the process becomes complicated However, in the present slot machine 10, the complexity of the processing can be suppressed. In the slot machine 10, the first valid standby period and the second valid standby period are set as the same period, but the periods may be different.

(First stop process)
Here, the first to third stop processes will be described. First, the first stop process will be described based on the flowchart of FIG. In step S1101, a first stop sliding number acquisition process is executed.

(First stop sliding number acquisition process)
The first stop slip number acquisition process will be described with reference to the flowchart of FIG. In the first stop slip number acquisition process, first, in step S1201, it is determined whether or not the stop reel information stored in the stop reel specifying buffer 184 of the RAM 153 is information on the left reel 42L. The stop reel information is stored in the stop reel specifying buffer 184 when detection signals are received from the stop detection sensors 72a to 74a. The stop reel specifying buffer 184 includes a first stop reel specifying buffer, a second stop reel specifying buffer, and a third stop reel specifying buffer, and the stop reel information corresponds to the order of stop commands. Stored in the buffer.

  When the stop reel information is information on the left reel 42L, a slip number acquisition process based on the slip table in steps S1202 to S1206 is executed. On the other hand, if the stop reel information is not information on the left reel 42L, a slip number acquisition process based on priority order information described later in steps S1207 to S1208 is executed. In other words, it can be said that the slot machine 10 selects one of the slip number acquisition process based on the slip table and the slip number acquisition process based on the priority information for the first stop according to the stop target. Since the case where the left reel 42L stops as the first stop as described above is described, an affirmative determination is made in step S1201, and a slip number acquisition process based on the slip table in steps S1202 to S1206 is executed.

  In step S1202, when the first stop command is received, a symbol number that reaches the lower stage of the left display window 31L (hereinafter referred to as a reaching symbol number) is acquired (the function for acquiring this reaching symbol number is a reaching section). Configure area grasping means). In the subsequent step S1203, the smooth table address is acquired from the smooth table address buffer 182 of the RAM 153. The slip table address is stored in the slip table address buffer 182 in the slip table acquisition process in step S702 described above. Thereafter, in step S1204, the number of threads corresponding to the reaching symbol number acquired in step S1202 is acquired from the address table (see FIG. 22).

  In a succeeding step S1205, a stop position setting process is executed (a function for executing the process constitutes a stop partition area determination unit). In the stop position setting process, the number of symbols actually stopped at the lower stage of the left display window 31L (hereinafter referred to as stop symbol number) is added by adding the number of slips acquired in step S1204 to the reaching symbol number. calculate. The calculated stop symbol number is stored in the stop position buffer 185 of the RAM 153 as stop position information.

  In subsequent step S1206, the priority line corresponding to the reaching symbol number is stored as priority line information in the priority line buffer 186 of the RAM 153, and the value of the drawing bit offset corresponding to the reaching symbol number is set as the drawing bit offset information in the RAM 153. Are stored in the buffer 187 for the drawn bit offset. Specifically, as described above, since the priority line and the lead-in bit offset are set in the slip table in a one-to-one correspondence with the symbol number, the priority line and the lead-in bit offset corresponding to the reaching symbol number are set. The information is acquired and stored in the corresponding buffers 186 and 187, respectively.

  Here, the priority line is a line that preferentially stops a combination of symbols corresponding to the winning combination among a plurality of main lines ML1 to ML4. For example, when the priority line is “ML1”, the combination of symbols corresponding to the winning combination is stopped with priority over the main line ML1. The pull-in bit offset is information for specifying a pull-in bit table to be referred to when creating priority information described later.

  Returning to the description of the first stop process, after executing the first stop slip number acquisition process in step S1101, the stop interrupt process is permitted in step S1102.

(Stop interrupt processing)
The stop interrupt process will be described with reference to the flowchart of FIG. The stop interrupt process is a part of the stepping motor control process in step S206 in the timer interrupt process (FIG. 14) described above. Then, by executing the process of step S1102 in the first stop process, a stop interrupt process is executed as part of a series of processes in the stepping motor control process. As described above, since the timer interrupt process is started at a cycle of 1.49 msec, the stop interrupt process is also started at a cycle of about 1.49 msec while the stop interrupt process is permitted.

  In the stop interrupt process, first, in step S1301, it is determined whether or not stop completion information is stored in the stop completion information buffer 188 of the RAM 153. If the stop completion information is stored, it means that the deceleration process has already been completed, so the stop interrupt process is ended as it is. If stop completion information is not stored, it is determined in step S1302 whether deceleration processing is in progress. If the deceleration process is in progress, the process directly proceeds to step S1305 without executing the processes in steps S1303 and S1304. On the other hand, if the deceleration process is not being performed, the process proceeds to step S1303. In step S1303, it is determined whether or not the symbol of the stop symbol number set in the previous stop position setting process has reached the base point position (lower stage in the present embodiment). If the symbol of the stop symbol number has not reached, the process proceeds to step S1305 as it is. When the symbol of the stop symbol number has reached, the deceleration process is started in step S1304, and then the process proceeds to step S1305. As a result, the symbol of the stop symbol number corresponding to the stop position information stored in the stop position buffer 185 of the RA 153 stops at the base point position of the first stop target reel.

  In step S1305, it is determined whether the deceleration process has ended and the first stop target reel has stopped. If not stopped, the stop interrupt processing is terminated as it is. If stopped, the stop completion processing is stored in the stop completion information buffer 188 of the RAM 153 in step S1306, and then the stop interrupt processing is ended. .

  Returning to the description of the first stop process, after the stop interrupt process is permitted in step S1102, whether the stop reel information stored in the stop reel specifying buffer 184 of the RAM 153 is the information of the left reel 42L in step S1103. Determine whether or not. If the stop reel information is not information on the left reel 42L, the process proceeds to step S1106 after executing the processing of step S1104 and step S1105. If the stop reel information is information on the left reel 42L, the process proceeds to step S1106. Here, since the case where the left reel 42L is stopped as the first stop is described, an affirmative determination is made in step S1103, and the process directly proceeds to step S1106.

  In step S1106, the second stop and subsequent priority information creation processing is executed, and the process proceeds to step S1107. In step S 1107, it is determined whether stop completion information is stored in the stop completion information buffer 188. If stop completion information is stored, the process advances to step S1108. If stop completion information is not stored, the process waits in step S1107 until the first stop target reel stops. In such a case, the stop completion information is then stored in the stop interrupt process, so that an affirmative determination is made in step S1107 and the process proceeds to step S1108. In step S 1108, stop interrupt processing is prohibited, and stop completion information is cleared from the stop completion information buffer 188 in the RAM 153. Thereafter, the first stop process is terminated.

(Second priority post-priority information creation process)
The priority information generation process for the second and subsequent stops (the function for executing the process corresponds to the stop information deriving means) will be described with reference to the flowchart of FIG. The outline will be described prior to the detailed description. As described above, the sliding table is prepared only for the case where the left reel 42L is operated to stop at the first stop, for example, the middle reel 42M at the second stop. No slide table is prepared for use in other cases, such as when the operation is stopped. Therefore, when stopping reels for which no slip table is prepared (including the left reel 42L after the second stop), priority order information is created before the reel can be stopped.

  This priority order information is a stop information group for determining the priority order of symbol numbers to be stopped at the base point position (in the lower part of the display window in the present embodiment) with respect to the corresponding reel, and when the stop switch is pressed The slide table in which the relationship between the reaching symbol number that has reached the base point position and the stop symbol number that actually stops at the base point position is different in information properties. Further, the priority order information is created based on the stop position of the reel for which the stop operation has already been performed, the above-described gaming situation of the slot machine 10, the lottery result in the lottery process, and the like. When creating the priority information, each buffer in the RAM 153 is used. Of these buffers, the priority information buffer 189 is particularly important. Therefore, the priority information buffer 189 will be described. FIG. 29 is an explanatory diagram for explaining the priority order information buffer 189.

  As shown in FIG. 29A, the priority order information buffer 189 is composed of a large number of determination value calculation information buffers B (stop information storage means). The determination value calculation information buffer B is provided in a one-to-one correspondence with each symbol of each reel 42L, 42M, 42R. Further, since symbol numbers are set for the symbols of the reels 42L, 42M, and 42R, it can be said that the determination value calculation information buffer B is provided in one-to-one correspondence with the symbol numbers. Since 21 determination value calculation information buffers B are allocated to each of the reels 42L, 42M, and 42R, the priority order information buffer 189 has a total of 63 determination value calculation information buffers B.

  Each determination value calculation information buffer B is composed of a first buffer B1 as a higher information buffer and a second buffer B2 as a lower information buffer, as shown in FIG. Each of the first buffer B1 and the second buffer B2 is composed of 1 byte. Therefore, each determination value calculation information buffer B is composed of 2 bytes, and the priority order information buffer 189 is composed of 126 bytes in total.

  Each bit of the first buffer B1 and the second buffer B2 has a function for storing unique determination information individually or in a predetermined combination. Specifically, in the first buffer B1, the highest 7th bit has a function as an unfair winning determination bit for storing the unfair winning determination information, and the sixth bit stores replay information. The 5th bit has a function as a BB role bit for storing BB role information, and the 4th bit as a small role bit for storing small role information. The third to 0th bits have a function as acquired number bits for storing acquired number information.

  In addition, in a configuration having a gaming state other than the BB game as a special gaming state that is shifted based on the establishment of the transition trigger symbol, the BB role bit may have a function of storing role information corresponding to the gaming state. Good. From this point of view, it can be said that the BB combination bit is a special game state combination bit. By the way, as a special game state other than the BB game, an SB (single bonus) game that can be continued only one game time is conceivable. In addition, a so-called RB game, CB game, or CT game can be considered.

  As for the second buffer B2, the most significant seventh bit has a function as a kick determination bit for storing kick determination information, and the sixth bit is a first bit for storing first priority line information. It has a function as a priority line bit, the second to first bits have a function as a pull-in bit for storing pull-in bit information, and the zeroth bit is a second for storing second priority line information. It functions as a priority line bit. Note that the fifth to third bits of the second buffer B2 are blank.

  Based on each bit of the first buffer B1 and the second buffer B2, a total value (priority determination value) of the determination value calculation information buffer is calculated, and the total value is a priority when the above-described symbols are stopped. Become. That is, a symbol with a higher aggregate value has a higher priority, and a symbol with a lower aggregate value has a lower priority. Among the above bits, the initial value of the unfair winning determination bit and the kick determination bit is “1”, and the initial value of the other bits is “0”.

  When the left reel 42L is stopped as the first stop, there are two patterns, that is, the case where the middle reel 42M stops and the right reel 42R stops as the second stop. In the information creation process, the priority information for the middle reel 42M and the priority information for the right reel 42R are created. The creation of the priority information will be specifically described based on a flowchart.

  As shown in FIG. 28, in the second stop and subsequent priority information creation processing, first, in step S1401, the number of target reels for which priority information is created in the current second and subsequent priority information creation processing (specifically, "2") is stored in the target reel counter of the RAM 153, and information on the left reel 42L is stored as target reel information in the target reel information buffer 190 of the RAM 153.

  In the subsequent step S1402, it is determined by referring to the target reel information buffer 190 and the stop reel specifying buffer 184 whether the target reel information is information on a reel for which a stop command has already been issued. If it is not information on a reel for which a stop command has already been issued, the process proceeds to step S1404 after executing determination value calculation information creation processing in step S1403. On the other hand, if it is information on a reel for which a stop command has already been issued, the process proceeds to step S1404 as it is. Since this time is the case where the left reel 42L stops as the first stop, an affirmative determination is made in step S1402, and the process proceeds to step S1404.

  In step S1404, it is determined whether or not the value of the target reel counter is “0”. If it is not “0”, in step S1405, the target reel information stored in the target reel information buffer 190 is updated, and the value of the target reel counter is decremented by 1. Then, the process returns to step S1402. The update of the target reel information is updated to the target reel information of the middle reel 42M when the stored target reel information is the information of the left reel 42L, and the already stored target reel information is updated to the middle reel 42M. Is updated to the target reel information of the right reel 42R. When the target reel information is updated to information on a reel for which a stop command has not yet been issued, an affirmative determination is made in step S1402, and a determination value calculation information creation process is executed in step S1403.

(Judgment value calculation information creation process)
The determination value calculation information creation process will be described based on the flowchart of FIG. The outline will be described prior to the detailed description. In the determination value calculation information creation process, each symbol number is the base point position (on the main line ML3, which is the lower line) in the reel corresponding to the target reel information (hereinafter referred to as the target reel). Assuming that the information is stopped, information “0” or “1” is stored for each bit of the determination value calculation information buffer B corresponding to the assumed target symbol number in consideration of various states. The determination value calculation information is created by performing the process. For example, in a situation where the 18th “red 7” symbol of the left reel 42L is stopped in the lower stage, if the target symbol number is 0 of the middle reel 42M, the situation shown in FIG. 31 (a) is assumed. The determination value calculation information is created in the 0th determination value calculation information buffer B. Further, in the determination value calculation information creation process, the target symbol number is updated one by one, and the determination value calculation information is created for each symbol number. Therefore, after the determination value calculation information is created for the symbol number 0 of the middle reel 42M, the target symbol number is No. 1, and the number 1 determination is made assuming the situation shown in FIG. 31 (b). Determination value calculation information is created in the value calculation information buffer B.

  As shown in FIG. 30, in the determination value calculation information creation process, first, in step S1501, the determination value calculation information buffer address of the target reel is acquired. That is, based on the target reel information stored in the target reel information buffer 190 of the RAM 153, the reel for which priority information is to be created this time is specified, and judgment value calculation information for the number of symbols corresponding to that reel (21) is calculated. The address of the buffer B is acquired.

  In the subsequent step S1502, the information stored in the target symbol buffer 191 of the RAM 153 is initialized, that is, “0” is cleared. Thereby, No. 0 becomes the target symbol number. Thereafter, information of “0” or “1” is obtained for each bit of the determination value calculation information buffer B of the target symbol number by executing the drawing bit information setting processing in step S1503 and the winning determination processing in step S1504. The judgment value calculation information is created by storing.

  In subsequent step S1505, by updating the information in the target symbol buffer 191, the target symbol number is set to a symbol number one higher than the currently set symbol number. Thereafter, in step S1506, it is determined whether all determination value calculation information for the target reel has been created. If it has not been created, the process returns to step S1503. Thereby, the processing of step S1503 to step S1505 is repeated until all determination value calculation information for the target reel is created. Then, when all the determination value calculation information is created, an affirmative determination is made in step S1506, and the determination value calculation information creation process ends.

  The details of the drawn bit information setting process in step S1503 and the winning determination process in step S1504 will be described in detail.

(Retrieving bit information setting process)
First, the lead-in bit information setting process will be described with reference to the flowchart of FIG. Here, the pull-in bit constitutes a part of the second buffer B2 in the determination value calculation information buffer B as described above. By storing the pull-in bit information in such a pull-in bit, it is possible to diversify the stopping points when no winning is made in the lottery process. In addition, when a winning combination is won in the lottery process, if a so-called miss-out occurs, it is possible to stop corresponding to that. In particular, in the BB winning situation, so-called reach eyes can be made to appear appropriately. The reach eye is a stop outcome displayed when it is impossible to stop the corresponding BB symbol combination on the active line under the BB winning situation. As this reach, for example, “red 7” symbol, “white 7” symbol, “youth” symbol, “lucky” symbol can be placed in any order and combination on either the main line ML1 to ML4 or the subline SL1. There is a stop event in which a symbol or a combination of symbols corresponding to any combination stops on the subline SL1 (ineffective line) without stopping on the effective line. In this slot machine 10, the same stoppage as the reach may be displayed even in a BB non-winning situation, and such case will be described later. In the attraction-in bit information setting process, preparation for acquiring the value of the attraction-in bit in the winning determination process is performed.

  In the drawn-in bit information setting process, as shown in FIG. 32, a drawn-in bit information pre-preparation process is executed in step S1601. In the preparatory process for the drawn bit information expansion, first, the drawn bit information search buffer 192 of the RAM 153 is initialized. Here, the pull-in bit information search buffer 192 is a buffer prepared for acquiring the pull-in bit information. As shown in FIG. 33A, the left reel buffer 193, the middle reel buffer 194, And the right reel buffer 195, and the reel buffers 193, 194, 195 are respectively provided with upper buffers 193a, 194a, 195a, middle buffers 193b, 194b, 195b, and lower buffers 193c, 194c, 195c. Have. That is, the pull-in bit information search buffer 192 includes nine buffers 193a to 193c, 194a to 194c, and 195a to 195c. Each of these nine buffers 193a to 193c, 194a to 194c, and 195a to 195c has a 1-byte configuration. In the state where the buffer for retrieving pull-in information 192 is initialized, “FF” is stored in each of the buffers 193a to 193c, 194a to 194c, and 195a to 195c, as shown in FIG.

  Thereafter, all the bits of the two buffers not on the priority line are cleared for the reel buffer corresponding to the reel for which a stop command has already been issued. This time, since the stop command has already been generated for the left reel 42L, the buffers 193a to 193c of the left reel buffer 193 are targeted. Assuming that the priority line is the main line ML4, the state shown in FIG. After executing the preparation process before drawing bit information expansion in the drawing bit information setting process, the drawing bit table acquisition process is executed in step S1602.

  In the pull-in bit table acquisition process, a process of acquiring one pull-in bit table from a large number of pull-in bit tables stored in the pull-in bit table storage area 152b of the ROM 152 is executed based on the pull-in bit offset already acquired.

(Acquisition bit table acquisition processing)
Specifically, as shown in FIG. 34, first, in step S1701, an offset reference table acquisition process is executed. In the offset reference table acquisition process, if there is an offset reference table, the offset reference table is acquired based on the game situation in the current game and the presence / absence of a winning combination. The offset reference table is a group of information that is stored in advance in the offset reference table storage area 152c of the ROM 152 and that acquires the pull-in bit table based on the pull-in bit offset that has already been acquired. However, such an offset reference table is not prepared for a situation in which a winning combination that does not cause missing is selected. Withdrawal bit information, as described above, to make a predetermined stoppage when there is a so-called spillover if no winning is made in the lottery process or if a winning combination is won in the lottery process Therefore, it is not necessary to store the pull-in bit information in the pull-in bit of the determination value calculation information buffer B for the situation where the winning combination that does not cause the miss-out occurs, and it is also necessary to acquire the pull-in bit table accordingly. Because there is no. In the slot machine 10, for example, an offset reference table used in a situation where a re-game player is won is not stored.

  Here, the offset reference table will be specifically described. Each pull-in bit offset is stored in the offset reference table, and a pull-in bit table number is assigned corresponding to each pull-in bit offset. More specifically, two pull-in bit table numbers from among a large number of pull-in bit table numbers (for example, 100) are assigned to each pull-in bit offset. When the left reel 42L stops as the first stop, the number of one pull-in bit table is for the middle reel 42M, and the number of the other pull-in bit table is for the right reel 42R. In this way, by adopting a configuration in which the number of the pull-in bit table is specified based on one pull-in bit offset and the offset reference table, the amount of information stored in the RAM 153 when acquiring the pull-in bit table Reduction can be achieved. For example, if the configuration is such that the drawing bit table number is directly stored without providing the drawing bit offset, the drawing bit table number for the middle reel 42M and the drawing bit table number for the right reel 42R are individually stored. It is necessary to keep.

  In the following step S1702, it is determined whether or not there is an offset reference table to be acquired in step S1701. If there is no offset reference table, after clearing the pull-in bit table buffer 196 for storing the pull-in bit table number information in step S1703, the pull-in bit table acquisition process is terminated. On the other hand, if there is an offset reference table, it is determined in step S1704 whether or not the pull-in bit offset stored in the pull-in bit offset buffer 187 of the RAM 153 is “0”.

  In the offset reference table, the number of the pull-in bit table is not set for the zero-th pull-in bit offset. In the slot machine 10, as in the case of a bell, the left reel 42L is not dropped when the first stop operation is performed, but the middle reel 42M or the right reel 42R may be missed when the first stop operation is performed. There is a role. That is, the “bell” symbols forming the bell winning are set so that the “bell” symbols are set to be equal to or less than the maximum number of reels in the middle reel 42M and the right reel 42R, but in the left reel 42L. Is set to be equal to or less than “(maximum number of slips) + (number of symbols stopped in the range where the effective line is set) −1” and exceeding the maximum number of slips. For such a combination, an offset reference table is prepared in advance. However, when the first reel 42L is operated to stop, the pull-in bit table is acquired by setting the pull-in bit offset to “0”. I do not do it. Since the game this time is when the left reel 42L is operated for the first stop, the winning bit offset is “0” when the player wins the bell role in the lottery process.

  If the drawn bit offset is “0”, a negative determination is made in step S1704, and the drawn bit table buffer 196 is cleared in step S1703, and then the drawn bit table acquisition process is terminated. If the pull-in bit offset is not “0”, the process proceeds to step S1705. In step S1705, the acquired bit offset is referred to the offset reference table acquired this time, and the number of the acquired bit table is acquired. Then, the information of the acquired pull-in bit table number is stored in the pull-in bit table buffer 196. Thereafter, the acquisition bit table acquisition process is terminated.

  Returning to the description of the pull-in bit information setting process, after executing the pull-in bit table acquisition process, the process proceeds to step S1603. In step S1603, it is determined whether or not the information of the drawn bit table number is stored in the drawn bit table buffer 196. If the information of the pull-in bit table number is not stored, that is, if “0” is stored, “00” is set in each pull-in bit information search buffer 192 in the current target reel in step S1604. After storing, the drawing bit information setting process is terminated. If the information of the pull-in bit table number is stored, the process proceeds to step S1605.

  In step S1605, a pull-in bit information acquisition process is executed. In the pull-in bit information acquisition process, a pull-in bit table is specified based on the information stored in the pull-in bit table buffer 196, and the target bit number pull-in bit information (hereinafter referred to as low-level pull-in bit information), Retrieval bit information of the symbol number one symbol number higher than the target symbol number (hereinafter referred to as “middle stage pull-in bit information”), and retraction bit information of the symbol number two symbol numbers higher than the target symbol number ( Hereinafter, the upper stage pull-in bit information) is acquired.

  Here, the pull-in bit table will be described. The pull-in bit table is prepared in correspondence with the BB winning status, the winning status of a predetermined small role (a small role that may be missed), and the lottery outage status where no role is won in the lottery process. . Incidentally, in a configuration in which reel control is performed only by a slide table as in the conventional slot machine, it is necessary to prepare a slide table corresponding to the winning situation of all the small roles. On the other hand, the drawing-in bit table is for determining a stop mode when a winning is not established, so it is not necessary to prepare for each winning combination of all small roles. From this point of view, the information amount for the pull-in bit table in the ROM 152 is smaller than the information amount for the sliding table in the conventional slot machine.

  The pull-in bit table is prepared not only for each of the above situations but also for each of the reels 42L, 42M, 42R. That is, the pull-in bit table is prepared for each of the reels 42L, 42M, and 42R in correspondence with each of the above situations. In this case, with respect to the left reel 42L, a pull-in bit table is prepared corresponding to a situation in which the left reel 42L is stopped after the second stop. For the middle reel 42M and the right reel 42R, a pull-in bit table is prepared corresponding to the case where the left reel 42L is first stopped and the case where the first stop is not operated (that is, irregularly pressed). Has been. Among these, when the first reel 42L is operated for the first stop, with respect to the BB winning situation and the lottery off situation, a pull-in bit table is prepared corresponding to the stop symbol number of the left reel 42L (this stop symbol) The correspondence with numbers is not necessarily one-to-one).

  In the configuration in which a large number of pull-in bit tables are prepared as described above, the pull-in bit tables are not provided corresponding to the combination lines (main lines ML1 to ML4, subline SL1). This is because various bits other than the pull-in bits are allocated in the determination value calculation information buffer B, and the combination of symbols can be stopped on a desired combination line without considering the combination line in the pull-in bit table. Because it can. On the other hand, in a configuration in which reel control is performed using only the slide table as in the conventional slot machine, it is necessary to prepare the slide table corresponding to each combination line. From this point of view, the information amount for the pull-in bit table in the ROM 152 is smaller than the information amount for the sliding table in the conventional slot machine.

  FIG. 35 shows an example of the pull-in bit table. The pull-in bit table is composed of 6 bytes. The pull-in bit information of symbol numbers 0 to 3 is stored in the first byte. The pull-in bits of symbol numbers 4 to 7 are stored in the second byte. The information is stored, the drawing bit information of the 8th to 11th symbol numbers is stored in the 3rd byte, and the drawing bit information of the 12th to 15th symbol numbers is stored in the 4th byte. The 5th byte stores the 16th to 19th symbol number drawing bit information, and the 6th byte stores the 20th symbol number drawing bit information. The pull-in bit information stored in these pull-in bit tables is any one of “00”, “01”, “10”, and “11” (that is, a plurality of types of pull-in bit information are prepared). "→" 01 "→" 10 "→" 11 "In this order, it is the pull-in bit information having a large value (various pull-in bit information can be distinguished in size). In this case, the pull-in bit table stores the pull-in bit information having a larger value as the symbol number has a higher priority in the corresponding situation. For example, with regard to the situation when a reach is to appear, the value of the drawn bit information of the symbol number that constitutes the reach of the higher priority is larger than the drawn bit information of the symbol number that constitutes the reach of the lower priority. It has become. This priority can be set in a plurality of stages because a plurality of types of pull-in bit information are prepared as described above.

  In the acquisition bit information acquisition process, for example, when the target symbol number is 0, the values of the 0th and 1st bits of the first byte are acquired as lower-stage acquisition bit information, and 1 as intermediate-stage acquisition bit information. The values of the second and third bits of the byte are acquired, and the values of the fourth and fifth bits of the first byte are acquired as upper stage pull-in bit information.

  In the subsequent step S1606, each piece of drawn bit information acquired in the drawn bit information acquisition process is stored in the corresponding drawn bit information search buffer 192. In the drawing bit information setting process for the middle reel 42M, the lower drawing bit information is stored in the lower buffer 194c in the middle reel buffer 194, the middle drawing bit information is stored in the middle buffer 194b, and the upper buffer 194a. The upper stage pull-in bit information is stored in. For example, when the lower stage pull-in bit information is “11”, the middle stage pull-in bit information is “00”, and the upper stage pull-in bit information is “01”, the pull-in bit information search buffer 192 The state shown in FIG. 33 (d) is obtained. Thereafter, the pull-in bit information setting process is terminated.

(Winning determination process)
Next, the winning determination process will be described with reference to the flowcharts of FIGS. The outline will be described prior to the detailed description. In the winning determination process, the winning bit determination for each effective line for the set target symbol number and the combination of the drawn bit information stored in the drawn bit information search buffer 192 A value determination is executed, and processing for storing information in each bit of the determination value calculation information buffer B is sequentially executed based on the determination result.

  First, in step S1801, initialization processing is executed. In the initialization process, the corresponding determination value calculation information buffer B in the RAM 153 is initialized. In addition, initialization of the search line buffer 197 and the determined confirmation buffer 198 of the RAM 153 is executed. By initializing the search line buffer 197, the first search target becomes the main line ML1.

  In a succeeding step S1802, a line determination process is executed. The line determination process will be described with reference to the flowchart of FIG.

(Line judgment processing)
In the line determination process, first, in step S1901, the symbol number on the search line is specified for the reel for which the stop command has already been issued, and the symbol correspondence information of the symbol number is grasped. More specifically, after the symbol number on the search line is specified, the symbol type located on the search line is specified with reference to the symbol arrangement information stored in the ROM 152. Thereafter, the symbol correspondence table stored in the symbol correspondence table storage area 152g of the ROM 152 is referred to and the symbol correspondence information set for the identified symbol type is grasped. Here, the symbol correspondence information will be described in detail with reference to FIG.

  The symbol correspondence information is set in the symbol correspondence table stored in the symbol correspondence table storage area 152g of the ROM 152, and the symbol correspondence table is prepared for each reel 42L, 42M, 42R. In these symbol correspondence tables, the symbol type attached to the corresponding reel and the symbol correspondence information are associated with each other on a one-to-one basis.

  The symbol correspondence information is composed of first symbol correspondence information and second symbol correspondence information, and each of the first symbol correspondence information and the second symbol correspondence information is composed of 1 byte. That is, the symbol correspondence information is composed of 2 bytes.

  The first symbol correspondence information is information used in making a determination relating to winning, and has a function as utility symbol correspondence information. Specifically, as shown in FIG. 40, in the combination table storage area 152e of the ROM 152, combination information is stored in a one-to-one correspondence with the combination. Each combination correspondence information is composed of 1 byte, and the position of the bit storing “1” is different. That is, in this slot machine 10, eight types of roles are set when all the gaming states are combined, and by changing the positions where “1” is stored in the eight bits, the role correspondence information and the role Are associated on a one-to-one basis. The first symbol correspondence information is set so as to match the symbol correspondence information of each symbol when AND processing is performed on the first symbol correspondence information of each symbol constituting the winning symbol combination.

  For example, the role correspondence information of the first BB role is “00000010” as shown in FIG. On the other hand, the first symbol correspondence information of the “red 7” symbol of the left reel 42L is “00000010”, and the first symbol correspondence information of the “red 7” symbol of the middle reel 42M and the right reel 42R is “ 01000010 ". When the first symbol correspondence information of the “red 7” symbol of each reel 42L, 42M, 42R is AND-processed, “00000010” is obtained, which coincides with the first BB role combination information. Here, as shown in FIG. 39, for the middle reel 42M and the right reel 42R, “1” is stored in the same bit (sixth bit) in the first symbol correspondence information of all symbols. The position of this bit corresponds to the position of the bit in which “1” is stored in the first symbol correspondence information of the “cherry” symbol of the left reel 42L, and “1” in the role correspondence information of the cherry role. Corresponds to the position of the stored bit. This is because, for the cherry role, if the “cherry” symbol of the left reel 42L stops on the active line when winning, the winning is established and the stop symbols of the middle reel 42M and the right reel 42R are arbitrary. .

  In addition, unlike the slot machine 10, in a slot machine in which nine or more types of combinations that combine all the gaming states are set, the amount of information of the combination correspondence information is not enough for one byte, and it is necessary to make it more than two bytes. Accordingly, the information amount of the first symbol correspondence information needs to be 2 bytes or more.

  The second symbol correspondence information is information used for making a determination related to kicking off the stop appearance, and has a function as symbol correspondence information for kicking. Specifically, as shown in FIG. 41, the kicking correspondence table storage area 152f of the ROM 152 stores kicking correspondence information corresponding to combinations of symbols that can become kicking eyes, which will be described later. This kicking correspondence information is composed of 1 byte, and the position of the bit storing “1” is different. The second symbol correspondence information is set so as to coincide with the kicking correspondence information when the second symbol correspondence information of each symbol constituting the symbol combination that can be the kicked eye is AND-processed.

  However, unlike the role correspondence information, the kicking correspondence information is not associated one-to-one with each symbol combination, and the predetermined kicking correspondence information is associated with a plurality of patterns of symbol combinations. For example, for the “red 7” symbol, the “white 7” symbol, the “young” symbol, and the “lucky” symbol, the kicking correspondence information is “00000001” for any combination of patterns. In this way, by associating a combination of symbols of a plurality of patterns with one kicking correspondence information, compared to a configuration in which one kicking correspondence information is associated with one symbol combination and kicking correspondence information is set, The storage capacity relating to the kicking correspondence information is reduced, and as a result, the storage capacity of the ROM 152 is reduced.

  Unlike the slot machine 10, in a slot machine in which nine or more types of kicking correspondence information are set, the information amount of the kicking correspondence information is not sufficient for one byte, and it is necessary to set the number of the second pattern. The information amount of the correspondence information needs to be 2 bytes or more.

  Returning to the description of the line determination processing, the symbol correspondence information grasped in step S1901 is stored in a symbol correspondence information register provided in the CPU 151. In this case, when there are a plurality (two) of reels for which a stop command has already been issued, each symbol correspondence information is stored. Note that a symbol correspondence information buffer may be provided in the RAM 153, and the grasped symbol correspondence information may be stored therein.

  In subsequent step S1902, the symbol number on the search line is specified for the current target reel, and the symbol correspondence information of the symbol number is grasped. The grasped symbol correspondence information is also stored in a symbol correspondence information register provided in the CPU 151.

  In the subsequent step S1903, AND processing is performed on the grasped symbol correspondence information. Specifically, each first symbol correspondence information of each grasped symbol correspondence information is ANDed, and each second symbol correspondence information of each grasped symbol correspondence information is ANDed. Then, the result of the AND processing is stored as establishment determination information in the establishment determination buffer 199 of the RAM 153 in step S1904. The establishment determination buffer 199 is set corresponding to each of the first symbol correspondence information and the second symbol correspondence information, and the AND processing result of the first symbol correspondence information and the AND processing of the second symbol correspondence information are set. (Hereinafter, of the establishment determination information, the result of AND processing of the first symbol correspondence information is referred to as first establishment determination information, and the result of the AND processing of the second symbol correspondence information is referred to as the second establishment determination.) Called information). In the slot machine 10, since each of the first symbol correspondence information and the second symbol correspondence information is composed of 1 byte, the establishment determination buffer 199 is composed of 2 bytes. After performing the process of step S1904, the line determination process is terminated.

  Returning to the description of the winning determination process, in step S1803, the target reel information buffer 190 of the RAM 153 is checked to determine whether or not the current target reel is the left reel 42L. If the current target reel is the left reel 42L, the process proceeds to step S1805. If the current target reel is not the left reel 42L, the first establishment determination information correction process is executed in step S1804, and then the process proceeds to step S1805. Specifically, as the correction process of the first establishment determination information, for the first establishment determination information, the value of the bit (sixth bit) in which “1” is stored in the cherry role combination information is set to “0”. .

  In step S1805, it is determined by referring to the stop reel specifying buffer 184 in the RAM 153 whether there are two reels for which a stop command has been issued. In the case of two, the illegal winning process of steps S1807 to S1810 is executed. If not, the process proceeds to step S1806. Since this time is a winning determination process in the first stop process, there is one reel for which a stop command has been issued, a negative determination is made in step S1805, and the process proceeds to step S1806.

  In step S1806, the target reel information stored in the target reel information buffer 190 is checked to determine whether or not the current target reel is the left reel 42L, and the establishment determination buffer 199 of the RAM 153 stores the target reel information. Based on the first establishment determination information, it is determined whether there is a “cherry” symbol of the left reel 42L on the current search line. As a result, if the current target reel is the left reel 42L and the “cherry” symbol of the left reel 42L is on the search line, the unreasonable winning process in steps S1807 to S1810 is executed. If the current target reel is not the left reel 42L, or if there is no “cherry” symbol of the left reel 42L on the current search line, the process proceeds to step S1811. This time is a winning determination process when the left reel 42L is first stopped, and information on the middle reel 42M or the right reel 42R is stored as target reel information, so a negative determination is made in step S1806, The process proceeds to step S1811. Incidentally, when the information on the left reel 42L is stored as the target reel information under the condition that the left reel 42L is operated for the first stop, the second priority post-stop priority information creation process (see FIG. 28) is performed. Since an affirmative determination is made in S1402, the determination value calculation information creation process including the winning determination process is not performed.

  In step S1811, the winning combination determination buffer 181 in the RAM 153 is referenced to determine whether or not any combination has been won. If no winning combination has been won, the process proceeds to step S1825 without performing the processes in steps S1812 to S1824. If any combination is won, the process proceeds to step S1812.

  In step S1812, a winning symbol establishment determination process is executed. In the winning symbol establishment determination process, the first establishment determination information (information relating to the combination) of the establishment determination information stored in the establishment determination buffer 199 of the RAM 153 and the winning information stored in the winning combination determination buffer 181 of the RAM 153. And the result is stored in the determination table provided in the CPU 151 as determination information. This success / failure determination register is composed of 1 byte. The RAM 153 may be provided with a success / failure determination buffer, and the determination information may be stored in the buffer. When the first establishment determination information matches the winning information, the success / failure determination information matches the first establishment determination information stored in the establishment determination buffer 199, and the first establishment determination information matches the winning information. If not, “0” is cleared (“00000000” is stored).

  In subsequent step S1813, it is determined whether or not each symbol on the current search line constitutes a combination of symbols corresponding to the winning combination by referring to the register for determining whether or not the CPU 151 is successful. If not configured, the process proceeds to step S1825 without performing the processes in steps S1814 to S1824. If so, the process advances to step S1814. If the search line is not a valid line (at least when the search line is subline SL1), a negative determination is made in step S1813 even if the combination of symbols is configured. To do. This is because a line that is not an effective line is not related to winning.

  In step S1814, by referring to the winning combination determination buffer 181 of the RAM 153, it is determined whether or not the re-game is won. If the regame is won, the process proceeds to step S1815. If the regame is not won, the process proceeds to step S1816 without executing the process of step S1815. In step S <b> 1815, it is determined whether information for determining whether or not the game is correct is stored in the register for determining whether or not the CPU 151 is correct.

  When the determination information other than replay is not stored, the process proceeds to step S1816. If the information for determining whether or not the game is other than replay is stored, the process proceeds to step S1825 without performing the processes in steps S1816 to S1824. Specifically, when a re-game win is made in the BB winning situation, and the winning / determining determination information corresponding to the BB combination is stored in the winning / failing determination register, a payout number acquisition process and a determination value calculation information buffer to be described later The process of storing “1” in the BB combination bit of B is not executed. This is for giving the highest priority to the re-game winning in the situation where the re-game is won no matter what the stop order or stop operation timing of the stop switches 72 to 74 is.

  In step S1816, a payout number acquisition process is executed. Here, the payout number acquisition process will be described with reference to FIG.

(Payout number acquisition processing)
In the payout number acquisition process, the success / failure determination information is acquired from the validity determination register of the CPU 151 in step S2001. In the subsequent step S2002, the type of the information for determining whether or not the game is successful is determined, and “1” is stored in the corresponding bit of the winning combination type buffer 200 in the RAM 153. The winning combination type buffer 200 is composed of 1 byte, and one bit is allocated to each of the replay and the BB combination.

  In the subsequent step S2003, it is determined by referring to the stop reel specifying buffer 184 in the RAM 153 whether or not there is even one reel for which a stop command has been issued. If there is none, the process proceeds to step S2004. If there is one, the process proceeds to step S2005 as it is. Since this time is a winning determination process in the first stop process, there is one reel for which a stop command has been issued, an affirmative determination is made in step S2003, and the process proceeds to step S2005.

  In step S2005, the payout number table stored in the payout number table storage area 152d of the ROM 152 is acquired. The payout number table is a table in which the winning combination and the number of payout medals corresponding to the winning combination are stored. For example, information as shown in FIG. 9 is stored. In the subsequent step S2006, the payout number corresponding to the success / failure determination information is acquired from the payout number table, and the acquired payout number is added to the acquired number bit of the determination value calculation information buffer B as acquired number information. Thereafter, the payout number acquisition process ends.

  Returning to the description of the winning determination process, after the payout number acquisition process is executed, in step S1817, the determination information stored in the determination register of the CPU 151 is stored in the determined confirmation buffer 198 of the RAM 153. Store as information. The determined confirmation buffer 198 is composed of 1 byte.

  In the subsequent step S1818, the winning combination classification buffer 200 is referred to and it is determined whether or not the winning combination is re-game information. If it is replay information, “1” is stored in the replay bit of the determination value calculation information buffer B in step S1819, and then the process proceeds to step S1823. If it is not replay information, the process proceeds to step S1820.

  In step S1820, the winning combination classification buffer 200 is referenced to determine whether or not the winning combination is BB combination information. If it is BB combination information, “1” is stored in the BB combination bit of the determination value calculation information buffer B in step S1821, and then the process proceeds to step S1823. If it is not the BB combination information, “1” is stored in the small combination bit of the determination value calculation information buffer B in step S1822, and then the process proceeds to step S1823.

  In step S 1823, it is determined whether or not the current search line matches the information on the priority line stored in the priority line buffer 186 of the RAM 153. If they match, “1” is stored in the first priority line bit of the determination value calculation information buffer B in step S1824, and then the process proceeds to step S1825. If they do not match, the process proceeds directly to step S1825.

  In step S1825, by referring to the stop reel specifying buffer 184 in the RAM 153, it is determined whether or not there are two reels for which a stop command is generated. In the two cases, the kicking process in steps S1827 to S1830 is executed. If not, the process proceeds to step S1826. Since this time is a winning determination process in the first stop process, there is one reel for which a stop command has been issued, a negative determination is made in step S1825, and the process proceeds to step S1826.

  In step S1826, the target reel information stored in the target reel information buffer 190 is checked to determine whether or not the current target reel is the left reel 42L, and the establishment determination buffer 199 of the RAM 153 stores the target reel information. Based on the first establishment determination information, it is determined whether there is a “cherry” symbol of the left reel 42L on the current search line. As a result, if the current target reel is the left reel 42L and the “cherry” symbol of the left reel 42L is on the current search line, the kicking process in steps S1827 to S1830 is executed. If the current target reel is not the left reel 42L, or if there is no “cherry” symbol of the left reel 42L on the current search line, the process proceeds directly to step S1831. This time is a winning determination process when the left reel 42L is first stopped, and information on the left reel 42L is not stored as current target reel information, so a negative determination is made in step S1826. The process proceeds to step S1831. In step S1831, a pull-in bit information search process is executed. Here, the lead-in bit information search process will be described.

(Retrieving bit information search process)
In the lead-in bit information search process, as shown in FIG. 43, a composite process of the lead-in bit information search buffer 192 is executed in step S2101. In such a synthesis process, with respect to the drawn bit information search buffer 192 in which the drawn bit information is set in the drawn bit information setting process described above, the drawn bit information of each buffer on the current search line is ANDed.

  Specifically, using FIG. 33 (e), when the search line is the main line ML1, “00”, “00”, and “FF” from the left. Therefore, when these are ANDed, the pull-in bit information composite value is “00”. On the other hand, when the search line is the main line ML3, “FF”, “11”, and “FF” are displayed from the left. Therefore, when these are ANDed, the combined bit information composite value becomes “11”.

  In the subsequent step S2102, it is determined whether or not the drawn bit information composite value acquired in step S2101 is “00”. If the pull-in bit information composite value is “00”, the pull-in bit information search process is terminated as it is. If the pull-in bit information composite value is not “00”, the process advances to step S2103.

  In step S2103, it is determined whether or not the current pull-in bit information composite value is the same as the previous result. If the result is the same as the previous one, the process proceeds to step S2106 without executing the processes in steps S2104 and S2105. On the other hand, if the result is not the same as the previous one, the process proceeds to step S2104.

  In step S2104, it is determined whether or not the current pull-in bit information composite value is larger than the previous result. If the result is smaller than the previous result, the lead-in bit information search process is terminated as it is. If the result is larger than the previous result, in step S 2105, the drawn bit information composite value is stored in the drawn bits of the determination value calculation information buffer B. Here, the case where the combined value of the drawn-in bit information is large is, for example, in the current search line, there is a case where a stop event corresponding to the time of missing is configured and a stop event with a higher priority is configured. Conceivable. In addition, in the BB winning situation, there may be a case where a reach having a higher priority is configured in the current search line. Thereafter, the process proceeds to step S2106.

  In step S 2106, it is determined whether or not the current search line matches the information on the priority line stored in the priority line buffer 186 of the RAM 153. If they match, “1” is stored in the second priority line bit of the determination value calculation information buffer B in step S2107, and then the lead-in bit information search process ends. If they do not match, the lead-in bit information search process is terminated as it is.

  Returning to the description of the winning determination process, after executing the lead-in bit information search process, the process proceeds to step S1832. In step S1832, the search line buffer 197 is referenced to determine whether or not the processing in steps S1802 to S1831 has been executed for all search lines. Specifically, the processing of steps S1802 to S1831 is executed for all the five lines of the main lines ML1 to ML4 and the subline SL1, and the order is changed from the main lines ML1 to ML4 to the subline SL1. Therefore, in step S1832, it is determined whether the search line is the subline SL1. Note that the search order is not limited to the above, and the search may be performed first from the subline SL1.

  When the search line is the subline SL1, the winning determination process is terminated. If the search line is not the subline SL1, the process proceeds to step S1833. In step S1833, the search line is updated by updating the information in the search line buffer 197. Thereafter, the processing of steps S1802 to S1831 is executed for the search line.

  By executing the winning determination process, determination value calculation information corresponding to the current target symbol number is created. In this configuration, the slot machine 10 may win a replay or a small role in the BB winning situation. Therefore, depending on the target symbol number, “1” may be stored in the replay bit or the small combination bit in a situation where “1” is stored in the BB combination bit of the determination value calculation information buffer B. In the case where “1” is stored in each of the BB role bit and the small role bit, for example, as shown in FIG. 44A, the “red 7” symbol of No. 18 stops in the lower stage of the left reel 42L. If the target symbol number is the 18th “red 7” symbol of the middle reel 42M in the situation where the search line is the main line ML1, “1” is stored in the small role bit and the search is performed. When the line is the main line ML3, “1” is stored in the BB combination bit.

  In the payout number acquisition process in step S1816, information on the payout number corresponding to the winning combination determined in each search line is added to the acquired number of bits. For example, in a game selected as a watermelon role, as shown in FIG. 44 (b), when the 14th “watermelon” symbol is stopped at the bottom of the left reel 42L, the symbol of the target symbol number is the middle reel. In the case of the 42M No. 3 “replay” symbol, when the search line is the main line ML1, information indicating that the payout number is “6” is added to the acquired number bit, and the search line is the main line. In the case of ML4, information indicating that the payout number is “6” is added to the acquired number bit. Therefore, the acquired number of bits in the target symbol number stores “12” information as acquired number information.

  As described above, in the determination value calculation information creation process (FIG. 30), update of the target symbol number is executed to create all determination value calculation information for the target reel. Further, in the second stop and subsequent priority information creation processing (FIG. 28), the determination value calculation information creation processing is executed for each reel for which a stop command has not yet been issued. That is, in the second stop and subsequent priority information generation process in the first stop process, all determination value calculation information for each reel for which a stop command has not yet been generated is generated. In this configuration, as described above, the priority information generation process for the second stop and after is executed in a situation where the interrupt process for stop is permitted. In other words, the deceleration process for the reels to be stopped and the priority information creation process for reels for which a stop command has not yet been issued are performed in parallel. In addition, the priority information generation process for the second and subsequent stops is processed so that it ends within a specified period from when the stop command is generated until the reel is slid by the maximum number of symbols (4 symbols) and stopped. Is set. Accordingly, priority order information can be created by effectively using the period during which the reel deceleration process is executed.

  The period from the start of the reel deceleration process to the completion of the stop varies depending on how much the reel to be stopped is slid and stopped. For example, the period is longer when the reel is stopped after sliding four symbols than when the reel is stopped without sliding one symbol. Therefore, when the reels are stopped without sliding for one symbol, the stop of the reels to be stopped may be completed before the creation of the priority information is completed. For example, when the reels are stopped, the creation of the priority information is completed before the stop of the reels to be stopped is completed.

  Incidentally, even when the stop of the reels to be stopped is completed before the creation of the priority order information is completed, the predetermined first effective waiting period has elapsed after the first stop command is generated as described above. Since the second stop operation is not validated until the second period has elapsed and the second stop command is not generated, stop control of the next reel is started even though the creation of the priority information is not completed. It is prevented. The same applies to the second stop process.

(Second stop process)
Next, the second stop process will be described based on the flowchart of FIG. In the second stop process, first, the second stop and subsequent slip number acquisition process is executed in step S2201.

(Slide number acquisition process for second stop and later)
In the second stop and subsequent slip acquisition processing, as shown in FIG. 46, first, the reel corresponding to the second stop command is specified by referring to the stop reel specifying buffer 184 in step S2301. In the subsequent step S2302, the reaching symbol number of the reel to be stopped when the second stop command is received is acquired (the function of acquiring this reaching symbol number constitutes the reaching section area grasping means). Thereafter, in step S2303, “0” is stored in the sliding number counter of the RAM 153, and then the process proceeds to step S2304.

  In step S2304, the symbol number for determination is acquired by adding the value of the slip counter to the reaching symbol number. Note that when the value of the slip counter is “0”, the symbol number for determination = the symbol number for reaching. In subsequent step S2305, a determination value calculation information buffer B corresponding to the determination symbol number is acquired. In step S2306, the priority determination value of the acquired determination value calculation information buffer B is calculated.

  Here, the priority order judgment value is a judgment value calculated by converting each bit of the judgment value calculation information buffer B from the upper side and assuming a 16-digit binary number into a hexadecimal number, It is represented by 4 digits by the hexadecimal numbers “0-9” and “A-F” (0 is the smallest and F is the largest). Therefore, the higher the number of “1” s stored in the first buffer B1 than in the second buffer B2, the higher the priority determination value. Furthermore, in each of the first and second buffers B1 and B2, “1” is set in the upper bits. The priority determination value becomes larger as it is stored.

  In the subsequent step S2307, it is determined whether or not the priority order determination value calculated in step S2306 is larger than the previously calculated priority order determination value. If the current time is larger, the current value of the slip counter is stored in the set slip number buffer 201 of the RAM 153 in step S2308, and then the process proceeds to step S2309. On the other hand, if the previous time is larger or the same, the process proceeds to step S2309 as it is.

  In step S2309, after adding 1 to the sliding number counter, the process proceeds to step S2310. In step S2310, it is determined whether the slip counter is “5”. If the slip counter is not “5”, the process returns to step S2304. On the other hand, if the slip number counter is “5”, the second and subsequent slip number acquisition processing is terminated.

  In other words, in the slip number acquisition process, five priority determination values from the reaching symbol number to the symbol number four symbols higher than the reaching symbol number are calculated and compared, and the highest priority determination value among them is calculated. The number of slides is specified so that the symbol with the larger symbol number becomes the stop symbol at the base position. Here, as described above, the priority determination value from the reaching symbol number to the symbol whose symbol number is four higher than the reaching symbol number can be slid up to four symbols. This is to make it possible to reduce the frequency of so-called spillage that does not stop the symbol or symbol combination corresponding to the winning combination on the active line, and it has not won the winning lottery. Nevertheless, it is possible to avoid the problem that the combination of winning symbols stops on the active line.

  FIG. 47 (a) in which the reaching symbol number is No. 0 in the middle reel 42M, and the priority determination values are “8008”, “800E”, “8008”, “800F”, “A008” in order from the reaching symbol number side. In the case of (), since the priority order determination value is “A008” which is the 4th “watermelon” symbol, the number of slips is specified to be “4”. As a result, when the middle reel 42M is stopped, it is slid by four symbols with respect to the reaching symbol, and as shown in FIG. 47 (b), the fourth "watermelon" symbol of the middle reel 42M is stopped. To do.

  Returning to the description of the second stop process, after the second stop and subsequent slip number acquisition process is executed, the stop position setting process is executed in step S2202 (the function for executing the process constitutes the stop partition area determining means). To do). In the stop position setting process, the number of slips is acquired by referring to the set slip number buffer 201. Then, the stop symbol number is calculated by adding the number of slips to the reaching symbol number, and information on the calculated stop symbol number is stored in the stop position buffer 185 of the RAM 153 as stop position information.

  In a succeeding step S2203, stop interruption processing is permitted. The stop interrupt process is as described above, and the reel decelerating process is executed so that the symbol of the stop symbol number stops at the base position on the reel that is the second stop target. In a succeeding step S2204, a priority line change process is executed.

(Priority line change processing)
In the priority line change process, as shown in FIG. 48, first, in step S2401, the winning combination determination buffer 181 of the RAM 153 is referred to, thereby determining whether or not any combination is won. If no winning combination is won, the priority line changing process is terminated. In other words, if the winning combination is not won, the priority line is not changed. On the other hand, if any combination is won, the process proceeds to step S2402.

  In step S2402, a pull-in bit information setting process is executed. In the pull-in bit information setting process, as already described in the determination value calculation information creation process, the processes in steps S1601 to S1606 in FIG. 32 are executed. However, in the lead-in bit information setting process in the priority line change process, the reel that is the current stop target is handled as the target reel.

  In the preparatory processing for drawing-in bit information expansion in step S1601, the stop processing is already performed after “FF” is stored in all the bits of each of the buffers 193a to 193c, 194a to 194c, and 195a to 195c in the buffer for retrieving bit information 192 of the RAM 153. All the bits of the two buffers not on the priority line are cleared for the reel buffer corresponding to the reel for which the process is completed. Specifically, since this is the priority line change process in the second stop process, all bits of the two buffers not on the priority line are cleared for the reel buffer corresponding to the reel stopped in the first stop process. .

  In the drawing bit table acquisition process in step S1602, a drawing bit table is acquired for the reel that is the current stop target. If there is a pull-in bit table, an affirmative determination is made in step S1603, and a pull-in bit information acquisition process is executed in step S1605.

  In the acquisition bit information acquisition process, the target symbol number, the symbol number one higher than the target symbol number, and the symbol number two higher than the target symbol number from the pull-in bit table acquired in step S1602. Rather than acquiring the pull-in bit information, the stop symbol number stored in the stop position buffer 185, the symbol number one higher than the stop symbol number, and the symbol number two higher than the stop symbol number Get pull-in bit information for.

  In step S1606, the drawn bit information acquired in the drawn bit information acquisition process is stored in the drawn bit information search buffer 192 corresponding to the reel that is the current stop target.

  Returning to the description of the priority line change process, after executing the pull-in bit information setting process, the search line buffer 197 is initialized in step S2403. By initializing the search line buffer 197, the first search target becomes the main line ML1.

  In a succeeding step S2404, a line determination process is executed. In the line determination process, as already described in the winning determination process, a process for creating establishment determination information is executed. However, in the line determination process in the priority line change process, only the reels for which a stop command has already been issued are targeted for determination, and therefore the process of step S1902 is not executed. That is, for the reels for which the stop process has been completed as the first stop target and the reels that are the second stop target, the symbol numbers stopped on the search line are specified, and the symbol correspondence corresponding to each symbol number is specified. AND the information. The result is stored in the establishment determination buffer 199 of the RAM 153.

  Thereafter, in step S2405, a winning symbol establishment determination process is executed. In the winning symbol establishment determination process, as described above, the first establishment determination information among the establishment determination information stored in the establishment determination buffer 199 of the RAM 153, and the winning information stored in the winning combination determination buffer 181 of the RAM 153, And the result is stored in the register for determining whether or not the CPU 151 is correct.

  In the subsequent step S2406, it is determined whether or not a combination of symbols corresponding to the winning combination is configured by referring to the information for determining whether or not the information is stored in the register for determining whether or not the CPU 151 is successful. If not configured, the process proceeds to step S2409 without executing the processes in steps S2407 and S2408. If so, the process advances to step S2407. If the search line is not an active line (at least when the search line is subline SL1), even if a combination of symbols corresponding to the winning combination is configured, step S2406 is entered. To make a negative decision. This is because a line that is not an active line is not related to winning.

  In step S 2407, it is determined whether or not the current search line matches the priority line information stored in the priority line buffer 186 of the RAM 153. If they match, the process proceeds to step S2420 without executing the processes of steps S2408 to S2419. If they do not match, the process proceeds to step S2408.

  In step S 2408, the current search line information is stored in the rewrite line buffer 202 of the RAM 153, and the first confirmation information is stored in the first confirmation information buffer 203 of the RAM 153. The first confirmation information is information for determining whether or not information on a line to be rewritten regarding a winning is stored in the rewrite line buffer 202, and specifically stores a 1-bit flag.

  In a succeeding step S2409, it is determined whether or not the first confirmation information is stored in the first confirmation information buffer 203. If the first confirmation information is stored, the process proceeds to step S2416 without executing the processes of steps S2410 to S2415. If the first confirmation information is not stored, the process proceeds to step S2410.

  In step S 2410, it is determined whether or not the second confirmation information is stored in the second confirmation information buffer 204 of the RAM 153. The second confirmation information is information for determining whether or not the information on the line to be rewritten regarding the lead-in bit information is stored in the rewrite line buffer 202, and specifically stores a 1-bit flag. . If the second confirmation information is stored, the process proceeds to step S2416 without executing the processes of steps S2411 to S2415. If the second confirmation information is not stored, the process proceeds to step S2411.

  In step S 2411, the process of combining the drawn bit information search buffer 192 is executed. In such a synthesis process, the information of each buffer on the current search line is ANDed with respect to the buffer 192 for retrieving bit information in which the retrieved bit information is stored in the retrieved bit information setting process in step S2402. Since this AND processing is as described above, detailed description thereof is omitted.

  In a succeeding step S2412, it is determined whether or not the drawn bit information composite value acquired in the step S2411 is “00”. If the pull-in bit information composite value is “00”, the process proceeds to step S2416 without executing steps S2413 to S2415. If the pull-in bit information composite value is not “00”, the process proceeds to step S2413.

  In step S 2413, the current search line information is stored in the rewrite line buffer 202 of the RAM 153. In the following step S2414, it is determined whether or not the current search line matches the information of the priority line stored in the priority line buffer 186 of the RAM 153. If they do not match, the process proceeds to step S2416 without executing the process of step S2415. If they match, the second confirmation information is stored in the second confirmation information buffer 204 of the RAM 153 in step S2415 and then step S2416. Proceed to

  In step S2416, by referring to the search line buffer 197, it is determined whether or not the processing in steps S2404 to S2415 has been executed for all search lines. More specifically, the processes in steps S2404 to S2415 are executed for all the five lines of main lines ML1 to ML4 and subline SL1, and the order is changed from main lines ML1 to ML4 to subline SL1. Therefore, in step S2316, it is determined whether or not the search line is the subline SL1. Note that the search line may not include the subline SL1. In this case, in step S2416, it is determined whether the search line is the fourth main line ML4. Moreover, it is good also as a structure which does not include an ineffective line in a search line.

  If the search is not completed, the search line is updated in step S2417, and then the process returns to step S2404. As a result, the processes in steps S2404 to S2415 are executed for the updated search line. On the other hand, if the search is complete, the process advances to step S2418.

  In step S2418, it is determined by referring to the rewrite line buffer 202 of the RAM 153 whether there is information on the rewrite line. If there is no rewrite line information, the process proceeds to step S2420 without executing the process in step S2419. If there is rewrite line information, the information in the rewrite line buffer 202 is stored in the priority line buffer 186 in step S2419. That is, the priority line is changed. Thereafter, the process proceeds to step S2420.

  In step S2420, the rewrite line buffer 202 and the first and second confirmation information buffers 203 and 204 in the RAM 153 are initialized. Thereafter, the priority line change process is terminated. Note that the processing in step S2420 may be executed together in step S2403. In addition, the slot machine 10 has a configuration in which the rewrite line buffer 202 is provided in the RAM 153 and the priority line is changed based on the information stored in the buffer 202 in order to execute the priority line change process. Instead of this, a rewrite line register may be provided in the CPU 151, and the priority line may be changed based on information stored in the register.

  By executing the priority line changing process, the priority line is changed in accordance with the stop point of the reel for which the stop command is issued. When the priority line is changed, as described in each of the above processes, the priority line is not changed if no winning combination has been won. In addition, when there is a possibility that a combination of symbols corresponding to the winning combination is established on the already set priority line, the priority line is not changed.

  If there is a possibility that a combination of symbols corresponding to the winning combination is established on an active line that is not a priority line that has already been set, the priority line is changed to the active line. Specifically, as shown in FIG. 49 (a), in the situation where the active line that has already been set is the main line ML4 and the watermelon role is selected, when the “watermelon” symbol is arranged in the lower row The priority line is changed from the main line ML4 to the main line ML3.

  Further, when there is no possibility that a combination of symbols corresponding to the winning combination is established on the effective line including the priority line, the priority line is changed to a line whose drawn bit information composite value does not become “00”. Specifically, as described above, reach eyes appear in the BB winning situation. For example, as a reach eye, there is an aspect in which a “white 7” symbol, a “red 7” symbol, and a “youth” symbol are arranged in a line from the left. In this case, as shown in FIG. 49 (b), in the situation where the priority line that has already been set is the main line ML1, when the “white 7” symbol and the “red 7” symbol are arranged in the upper row, With respect to the middle reel 42M, the upper pull-in bit information is not “00” and the pull-in bit information combined value for the main line ML2 is not “00”, so the priority line is changed from the main line ML1 to the main line ML2.

  Returning to the description of the second stop process, after the priority line change process is executed, the second stop and subsequent priority information generation process is executed in step S2205.

(Second stop and subsequent priority information creation processing in the second stop processing)
In the second stop and subsequent priority information generation process, as already described in the first stop process, the processes of steps S1401 to S1405 in FIG. 28 are executed. However, in the priority information generation process for the second and subsequent stops in the first stop process, the priority information is generated for the two reels (the middle reel 42M and the right reel 42L), but the second stop in the second stop process. In the subsequent priority order information creation processing, since there is only one reel for which a stop command has not yet been issued, creation of priority order information is executed only for that reel.

  In the determination value calculation information creation process of step S1403, assuming that each symbol number stops at the base point position for the remaining one reel with respect to the stop start of two reels for which a stop command has already been issued, Determination value calculation information is created for the assumed symbol number.

(Determination value calculation information creation process in the second stop process)
In the winning determination process of step S1504 in the determination value calculation information creation process, a process specific to the second stop process is executed. Such specific processing will be described below.

(Processing for unfair prizes)
Regarding the winning determination process (FIG. 36), since there is one reel for which a stop command has been issued in the first stop process, a negative determination is made in step S1805. On the other hand, in the second stop process, since there are two reels for which a stop command has been issued, an affirmative determination is made in step S1805, and an unfair prize winning process in steps S1807 to S1810 is executed.

  An unfair winning prize means that a combination of symbols constituting a winning combination is stopped on the active line even though the winning combination is not won. Then, in the unfair winning process, determination value calculation information is created so that a priority order determination value is surely smaller for a symbol number that may cause an unreasonable winning than a symbol number that does not cause an unreasonable winning.

  In the unfair prize winning process, first, in step S1807, in order to set information on a combination that is a target of determination as to whether or not the present prize winning process is an unfair winning prize, a mask information setting process for unfair prize is executed. .

  Here, the setting process of the mask information for unfair winning a prize will be described in detail. As described above, in this slot machine 10, there are a normal gaming state and a BB game as gaming states. In this case, the replay, the BB combination, and the small combination are the combinations that are the targets of the lottery in the normal gaming state, but are the targets that are not the targets of the lottery during the BB game. Therefore, it is necessary to set the replay, the BB combination, and the small combination as information on the combination to be determined as an unfair winning prize in the normal gaming state, or in the case of a BB game. It is necessary not to set it as information on a combination that is a determination target of winning or not. The JAC combination is a combination that is not a lottery target in the normal gaming state, but is a target for a lottery during the BB game. Therefore, regarding the JAC combination, it is necessary not to set it as information on a combination to be determined whether or not it is an unfair prize in the normal gaming state, and whether or not it is an unfair prize in the BB game. It is necessary to set as information on the combination to be determined.

  Therefore, in step S1807, the game information is determined from the mask information stored in the mask information storage area 152h of the ROM 152 so that the combination to be determined whether or not it is an improper winning is determined according to the game state. Select and set the mask information for unfair winning prizes. This setting is performed by storing the current mask information in a mask information register provided in the CPU 151. However, a mask information buffer may be provided in the RAM 153 and stored therein.

  The mask information for unfair winning a prize is composed of 2 bytes corresponding to the establishment determination information. That is, the mask information is composed of first mask information corresponding to the first establishment determination information and second mask information corresponding to the second establishment determination information among the establishment determination information. Of these, in the first mask information, “1” is stored in the bit corresponding to the bit in which “1” is stored in the combination information (FIG. 40) of the combination to be determined whether or not the prize is unfair. . Specifically, the first mask information of the mask information set in the normal gaming state corresponds to the respective role correspondence information of the re-game, the first to third BB roles, the watermelon role, the bell role, and the cherry role. Thus, “1” is stored in each bit, which is “01111111”. That is, it can be said that the first mask information for unreasonable winnings is information obtained by performing OR processing on the combination information of all the combinations to be determined whether or not they are unreasonable winnings. Note that the second mask information is information used in a kicking process described later, and thus the description thereof is omitted here.

  In step S1808, which is subsequent to the illegal prize winning process, an illegal prize determination process is executed. In the unfair winning determination process, as shown in FIG. 50, first, in step S2501, a process of changing the mask information stored in the mask information register of the CPU 151 to calculation information is performed. Specifically, each bit of the winning information stored in the winning combination determination buffer 181 of the RAM 153 is inverted and ANDed with the first mask information of the mask information stored in the mask information register, Change to calculation information. This calculation information is composed of 2 bytes like the mask information, and the first mask information in the original mask information is changed, but the second mask information remains as it is.

  In the subsequent step S2502, processing for creating avoidance information is performed. Specifically, the establishment determination information stored in the establishment determination buffer 199 of the RAM 153 is acquired, and the calculation information is ANDed with the acquired establishment determination information to create avoidance information. Specifically, the avoidance information is created by ANDing the corresponding bits of the establishment determination information and the calculation information each composed of 2 bytes. Therefore, the avoidance information is composed of 2 bytes, and includes first avoidance information and second avoidance information.

  When an unfair prize is generated, “1” is stored in any bit of the first avoidance information among the avoidance information created as described above. With respect to the first BB combination in the normal gaming state, this will be described by exemplifying a case where no illegal prize is generated and a case where an illegal prize is generated.

  First, a case where no unfair prize is generated will be described. The first mask information of the mask information set in the normal gaming state is “01111111” as described above. Further, when the first BB combination is won in the normal gaming state, the winning information is “00000010”. The first calculation information in this case becomes “01111101” by performing AND processing on “01111111” of the first mask information and “11111101” which is the inversion of the winning information. Further, when the winning symbol combination of the first BB combination is established on the search line, the first establishment determination information of the establishment determination information is “00000010”. Accordingly, the first avoidance information of the avoidance information in this case becomes “00000000” by performing AND processing on “01111101” and “00000010”.

  Next, a case where an unfair prize is generated will be described. The first mask information of the mask information set in the normal gaming state is “01111111” as described above. In addition, when no combination is won in the normal gaming state, the winning information is “00000000”. The first calculation information in this case becomes “0111111111” by performing AND processing on “01111111” of the first mask information and “11111111” which is the inversion of the winning information. When the winning symbol combination of the first BB combination is established on the search line, the first establishment determination information of the establishment determination information is “00000010” as described above. Therefore, the first avoidance information of the avoidance information in this case becomes “00000010” by performing AND processing on “01111111” and “00000010”.

  In step S1809, which continues in the unfair prize winning process, an unfair prize is generated by determining whether or not “1” is stored in any bit of the first avoidance information created in the illegal prize determination process. It is determined whether or not. However, if the search line is a non-valid line that is not a valid line, even if “1” is stored in any bit of the first avoidance information, it is determined that an unfair prize is not generated. This is because an ineffective line is a line unrelated to winning.

  If an unfair prize is not generated, the process proceeds to step S1811 as it is, and the processes after step S1811 are executed. On the other hand, if an unfair win occurs, after clearing all the bits of the determination value calculation information buffer B at the current symbol number “0” in step S1810, the winning determination process is terminated.

  Here, as described above, the unsuccessful prize determination bit in the determination value calculation information buffer B stores “1” as an initial value. On the other hand, when it is determined that an unreasonable winning will occur, all bits including the unreasonable winning determination bit are cleared to “0”. Therefore, it is possible to reduce the priority determination value of the target symbol number for which an unfair winning will occur with respect to the priority determination value of the target symbol number for which no unfair winning will occur, and the symbol number for which an unfair winning will occur. It is possible to prevent the reel from stopping at the base point position, and to prevent the occurrence of an unfair winning prize.

(Process for kicking off)
Regarding the winning determination process, since there is one reel for which a stop command has been issued in the first stop process, a negative determination is made in step S1825. On the other hand, in the second stop process, since there are two reels for which a stop command has been issued, an affirmative determination is made in step S1825, and the kicking process in steps S1827 to S1830 is executed.

  The kicking process is a process for avoiding the appearance of kicking eyes. The kicking eyes are stopping outcomes that do not constitute an unfair winning prize, but if they appear, they may cause confusion to the player in relation to the winning situation of the role and the gaming state. Specifically, in the slot machine 10, the reach eyes in the BB non-winning situation and the alternative eyes that appear when the possibility of losing a role such as a watermelon role is missed, and the alternative eyes at the time of the non-missing possibility role are kicked Is set as

  Here, specifically for the above reach eyes, any combination of “Red 7” symbol, “White 7” symbol, “Youth” symbol, and “Lucky” symbol is on any combination line (effective line and non- This applies to the case of stopping both (effective lines) (hereinafter, the reach is also referred to as a general reach). In addition, a case where a symbol or a combination of symbols corresponding to the winning combination is stopped on the subline SL1 without stopping on the active line.

  Specifically, as shown in FIG. 41, the alternative pattern includes a case where a predetermined combination pattern of “Lucky” symbol and “Watermelon” symbol stops on any combination line, and “Watermelon” symbol, This applies to the case where the “Youth” symbol, “Youth” symbol or “Watermelon” symbol, “Cherry” symbol, and “Watermelon” symbol are established on any combination line in this order.

  In addition to the above, as a kicking-out point, a stopping point in which a combination of symbols corresponding to a combination that is not a lottery target stops on the effective line is set as a kicking-out point. It is also possible to adopt a configuration in which a stop turn that stops on an effective line of a combination of symbols corresponding to a combination that is not a lottery target is set not as a kick-off eye but as an unfair prize.

  In the kicking process, first, in step S1827, a kicking mask information setting process is executed in order to set information on a stop event that is a determination target of whether or not the kicking eye is a kicking eye in the current kicking process.

  Here, the setting process of the mask information for kicking will be described in detail. The kicking mask information is stored in the mask information storage area 152h of the ROM 152, and is composed of 2 bytes composed of the first mask information and the second mask information, similarly to the mask information for unfair winning.

  Among these, when the combination of symbols corresponding to the combination that is the subject of the lottery stops on the ineffective line, the combination of symbols corresponding to the combination that is not the subject of the lottery is valid The case where the vehicle stops on the line is set as information on a stop event that is a target for determination as to whether or not it is a kicking eye. This is because, as described above, the first mask information corresponds to the first establishment determination information related to winning among the establishment determination information.

  The first mask information will be specifically described taking an example of a normal gaming state. When the current search line is an ineffective line under the BB non-winning situation, information on the combination of symbols corresponding to the winning combination is set in the first mask information. That is, in the first mask information, “1” is stored in each bit in association with each role correspondence information of the replay, the first to third BB roles, the watermelon role, the bell role, and the cherry role. 01111111 ". On the other hand, when the current search line is an invalid line under the BB winning situation, “1” is not stored in any of the bits and is “00000000”. That is, in the BB winning situation, the fact that the combination of the symbols corresponding to the combination that is the subject of the lottery stop on the ineffective line is not set as a kick-off. Further, when the current search line is an active line, information on a combination of symbols corresponding to a combination that is not a lottery target is set in the first mask information. In other words, since the JAC combination is a combination that is not a lottery target in the normal gaming state, “1” is stored in the bit corresponding to the bit storing “1” in the combination correspondence information of the JAC combination. , “10000000”. If the gaming state is a BB game, the first mask information is information obtained by inverting each bit in each of the above situations.

  In addition, when the general reach eye or the alternative eye is established on any line by the second mask information, it is set as information on a stop outcome that is a target for determination as to whether or not it is a kick eye. This is because, as described above, the second mask information corresponds to the second establishment determination information regarding kicking in the establishment determination information.

  The second mask information will be specifically described taking an example of a normal gaming state. When neither the BB winning status nor the watermelon winning status is set, information on both general reach and alternative eyes is set in the second mask information. That is, in the second mask information, “1” is stored in each bit in association with all the kicking correspondence information shown in FIG. 41, and is “00001111”. In addition, when the BB winning status is not the BB winning status, “1” is stored in each bit in association with the general reach kick-out correspondence information in the kick-out correspondence information shown in FIG. “00000001”. When the BB winning status is not the watermelon winning status, “1” is stored in each bit in association with the alternative kicking correspondence information in the kicking correspondence information shown in FIG. "00001110". Furthermore, in the case of a BB winning situation and a watermelon winning situation, “00000000” is set.

  In step S1827, the current kicking mask information is selected from the mask information storage area 152h of the ROM 152 and set based on the gaming state, winning combination status, and current search line information. This setting is performed by storing the current mask information in the mask information register provided in the CPU 151 as in the case of the unfair winning process, but the RAM 153 is provided with a mask information buffer and stored therein. A configuration may be adopted.

  In step S1828 following the kicking process, a kicked eye appearance determination process is executed. In the kicking eye appearance determination process, acquisition determination information stored in the establishment determination buffer 199 of the RAM 153 is acquired, and the mask information stored in the mask information register is ANDed with respect to the acquired determination determination information, Create avoidance information. That is, only the process of step S2502 in the above-described unfair prize determination process (FIG. 50) is performed to create avoidance information.

  When a kicked eye appears, “1” is stored in one of the first avoidance information and the second avoidance information in the avoidance information created as described above. This will be described with reference to the case where the kicking eye does not appear and the case where the kicking eye appears when the search line is an active line in the normal game state and no winning combination is won. . In this case, the first mask information is “10000000” as described above, and the second mask information is “00001111” as described above.

  First, the case where the kicked eye does not appear will be described. For example, when the “replay” symbol, the “watermelon” symbol, and the “red 7” symbol are arranged in this order on the search line, the establishment determination information is the first establishment information. Both the determination information and the second establishment determination information are “00000000”. Accordingly, the avoidance information in this case is “00000000” for both the first avoidance information and the second avoidance information.

  Next, a case where a kicked eye appears will be described. For example, when “replay” symbol, “replay” symbol, and “bell” symbol are arranged in this order on the search line, the establishment determination information is the first establishment information. The determination information is “10000000” and the second establishment determination information is “00000000”. Therefore, in the avoidance information in this case, the first avoidance information is “10000000” and the second avoidance information is “00000000”. Further, for example, when the “red 7” symbol, the “white 7” symbol, and the “young man” symbol are arranged in this order on the search line, the establishment determination information is the first establishment determination information “000000000” The second establishment determination information is “00000001”. Therefore, in the avoidance information in this case, the first avoidance information is “00000000” and the second avoidance information is “00000001”.

  Similarly, if the current search line is sub-line SL1 (that is, an ineffective line) and the “bell” symbol, “bell” symbol, and “bell” symbol are arranged on the search line, the game at that time If the situation is a BB non-winning situation, the first avoidance information is “00100000”, and if the situation is a BB winning situation, the first avoidance information is “00000000”.

  In step S1829 that continues in the kicking process, it is determined whether or not a kicked eye appears by determining whether or not “1” is stored in any bit of the avoidance information created in the kicking eye appearance determining process. Determine whether.

  If the kicked eye does not appear, the process proceeds to step S1831. On the other hand, when a kicked eye appears, after clearing the kick determination bit of the determination value calculation information buffer B for the target symbol number “0” in step S1830, the retrieval bit information search process of step S1831 is executed. Then, the process proceeds to step S1832. That is, for the target symbol number where the kicked eye appears, the kicking determination bit is “0”, and the pull-in bit and the second priority line bit are also “0”.

  Here, as described above, the kick determination bit in the determination value calculation information buffer B stores “1” as an initial value. On the other hand, if it is determined in step S1829 that a kicked eye will appear, the kick determination bit is cleared to “0”. Therefore, for a target symbol number having the same form of the first buffer B1 of the determination value calculation information buffer B, a target in which a kicked eye appears with respect to a priority determination value of a target symbol number in which the kicked eye does not appear The symbol number priority order determination value can be reduced, and it is avoided as much as possible that the symbol number at which the kicked eye appears is stopped at the base point position on the reel, and the appearance of the kicked eye can be avoided as much as possible.

  Returning to the description of the second stop process, after the second stop and subsequent priority information creation process is executed, it is determined in step S2206 whether stop completion information is stored in the stop completion information buffer 188 of the RAM 153. judge. If stop completion information is stored, since the stop of the reel that is the second stop target has been completed, the process proceeds to step S2207. If stop completion information is not stored, the process of step S2206 is repeatedly executed. In such a case, the stop completion information is then stored in the stop interrupt process, so that an affirmative determination is made in step S2206 and the process proceeds to step S2207. In step S 2207, stop interrupt processing is prohibited, and stop completion information is cleared from the stop completion information buffer 188. Thereafter, the second stop process is terminated.

(Third stop processing)
Next, the third stop process will be described based on the flowchart of FIG.

  In the third stop process, first, a second stop and subsequent slip number acquisition process is executed in step S2601. The details of the second stop and subsequent slip number acquisition processing are the same as described above, and will be omitted. Through this second stop and subsequent slip number acquisition process, the reel slip number corresponding to the third stop command is acquired.

  In the subsequent step S2602, a stop position setting process is executed (a function for executing the process constitutes a stop partition area determining unit). In the stop position setting process, a stop symbol number is calculated based on the number of slips acquired in step S2601, and the calculated stop symbol number is stored in the stop position buffer 185 of the RAM 153.

  In a succeeding step S2603, stop interruption processing is permitted. The stop interrupt process is as described above, and the reel decelerating process is executed so that the symbol of the stop symbol number stops at the base position on the reel that is the third stop target.

  Thereafter, in step S 2604, it is determined whether stop completion information is stored in the stop completion information buffer 188 of the RAM 153. If stop completion information is stored, the reel that is the third stop target has been stopped, and the process advances to step S2605. If stop completion information is not stored, the process of step S2604 is repeatedly executed. In such a case, the stop completion information is then stored in the stop interrupt process, so that an affirmative determination is made in step S2604 and the process proceeds to step S2605. In step S 2605, stop interrupt processing is prohibited, and stop completion information is cleared from the stop completion information buffer 188. Thereafter, the third stop process is terminated.

(Each process when pressing irregularly)
Next, the reel rotation process in step S603 and the reel stop process in step S604 will be described in the case where reels other than the left reel 42L are stopped as the first stop. However, in the following description, differences from the case where the left reel 42L stops as the first stop will be described.

(Reel rotation processing when pressing irregularly)
First, differences in the reel rotation process will be described.

  As described above, in the reel rotation processing (FIG. 19), irregular pressing priority order information creation processing is executed in step S704. The irregular pushing priority order information creation process is a process for creating a stop information group in advance for each of the reels 42M and 42R assuming that the middle reel 42M or the right reel 42R is stopped at the time of the first stop. It is.

(Anomaly pushing priority information creation processing)
The irregular pushing priority order information creation processing will be described with reference to the flowchart of FIG. In the irregular pressing priority order information creation process, first, in step S2701, information on the middle reel 42M is stored as target reel information in the target reel information buffer 190 of the RAM 153. In subsequent step S2702, information on the preset pull-in bit offset is stored in the pull-in bit offset buffer 187 of the RAM 153, and information on the pre-set priority line is stored in the priority line buffer 186 in the RAM 153.

  The pull-in bit offset and priority line at the time of irregular pressing are set for each of the middle reel 42M and the right reel 42R. In addition, the pull-in bit offset and priority line at the time of irregular pressing are set in accordance with the gaming situation of the slot machine 10, and further set in correspondence with each combination in each gaming situation. For example, with regard to re-games, the main line ML2 is set as a priority line for irregular pressing regardless of whether the game situation is a BB winning situation or a BB non-winning situation. Therefore, in step S2702, each information of the current target reel, the game situation, and the drawn bit offset and priority line corresponding to the winning combination is stored in the corresponding buffers 186 and 187.

  Regarding the pull-in bit offset at the time of irregular pressing, for the pull-in bit offset set when the middle reel 42M is first stopped, the pull-in bit table number (for example, 100) is selected. The number of the drawing bit table for the left reel 42L and the number of the drawing bit table for the right reel 42R are assigned. For the pull-in bit offset that is set when the right reel 42R is first stopped, the pull-in bit table number for the left reel 42L and the middle reel 42M for the pull-in bit table number out of the many pull-in bit table numbers. The pull-in bit table number is assigned.

  In a succeeding step S2703, a determination value calculation information creation process is executed. Thereafter, in step S2704, it is determined whether or not the target reel is the right reel 42R by referring to the target reel information buffer 190. If the target reel is not the right reel 42R, a negative determination is made in step S2704, information on the right reel 42R is stored as target reel information in the target reel information buffer 190 in step S2705, and then the process returns to step S2702. And after performing the process of step S2702 and step S2703 about the right reel 42R, by making an affirmative determination in step S2704, the priority order information generation process for irregular pushing is ended.

(Criteria value calculation information creation process in irregular push priority information creation process)
The determination value calculation information creation process in the irregular pushing priority order information creation process will be described. In the determination value calculation information creation process, the processing of steps S1501 to S1506 in FIG. 30 is executed in the same manner as the determination value calculation information creation process in the second and subsequent priority information creation process. However, since there is no reel for which a stop command has already been issued, it is assumed that each symbol number has stopped at the base point position for only the target reel, and determination value calculation information is created for the assumed target symbol number.

  With respect to the drawn bit information setting process in step S1503 in the determination value calculation information creation process, only the initialization of the drawn bit information search buffer 192 is executed in the drawn-bit information expansion preparation process in step S1601. Then, through the processing of steps S1602 to S1605, the lead-in bit information is stored in the lead-in bit information search buffer 192 for the target reel.

  In the winning determination process (FIG. 36) in step S1504 in the determination value calculation information creation process, a process specific to the payout number acquisition process in step S1816 is executed. Therefore, a specific process in the payout number acquisition process will be described with reference to the flowchart of FIG.

  In the situation where the irregular pushing priority information creation process is being executed, no stop command has been issued for any reel, so a negative determination is made in step S2003, and the flow proceeds to step S2004.

  In step S2004, AND processing is performed on the information obtained by inverting each bit of the determined confirmation buffer 198 in the RAM 153 with respect to the success / failure determination information acquired in step S2001. By executing such processing, when the determination information for winning / failure matches the winning determination information, all the bits for the determination information for determining success / failure are cleared to “0”. Therefore, in the payout number acquisition process in the irregular pushing priority order information creation process, the addition of the payout number is not executed for the same determination information as the determined confirmation information.

  This is due to the following reason. That is, if the target reel is the middle reel 42M and the symbol of the target symbol number is the first “white 7” symbol in the situation where the bell role is won, as shown in FIG. 53, the middle reel 42M The “bell” symbol will stop at the middle stage. In this case, assuming that the process of step S2004 is not executed, when the search line is the main line ML1, information on the number of payouts corresponding to the bell combination is added to the acquired number of bits in the determination value calculation information buffer B. Further, when the search line is the main line ML4, information on the number of payouts corresponding to the bell combination is added again to the acquired number of bits. That is, the acquired number information that is twice the actual payout number information with respect to the acquired number of bits is stored.

  Then, even if the priority line is set to the main line ML2 which is the upper line because the acquired number of bits is set higher than the first priority line bit in the determination value calculation information buffer B, “BELL The priority determination value when the symbol stops at the middle stage is larger than the priority determination value when the “bell” symbol stops at the upper stage, and the priority line is substantially changed to the main line ML1 or the main line ML4. It will be limited.

  On the other hand, by executing the processing of step S2004, it is possible to prevent the acquired number information obtained by doubling the actual payout number information with respect to the acquired number of bits, and to make the stop output monotonous. Can be prevented.

  Further, by executing the correction process of the first establishment determination information in step S1804 prior to the payout number acquisition process, the following excellent effects can be obtained.

  If the “Cherry” symbol of the left reel 42L stops on the active line when winning, the winning combination is established and the stop symbols of the middle reel 42M and the right reel 42R are arbitrary, so the middle reel 42M and For the right reel 42R, “1” is stored in the bit corresponding to the cherry role in the first symbol correspondence information of all symbols. In such a configuration, when no stop command is issued to the left reel 42L and the left reel 42L is not the target reel, the first establishment determination information always constitutes a combination of symbols corresponding to the cherry role. Information will be included. Then, in the above situation, it is determined in step S1813 that there is always a possibility of winning the cherry role, and the determination value calculation information cannot be created accurately. On the other hand, the occurrence of such inconvenience can be prevented by executing the correction process of the establishment determination information as described above.

  By executing the irregular pressing priority order information creation process, priority order information of the reels 42M and 42R when the middle reel 42M or the right reel 42R is stopped at the time of the first stop is created in advance. In such a configuration, as described above, the irregular pushing priority information creation processing is executed in a situation where the start interrupt processing is permitted. That is, the reel acceleration process and the irregularity pushing priority information creation process are performed in parallel. In addition, the processing time is set so that the irregular pushing priority order information creation processing ends within the acceleration period from the start of the acceleration processing of the reels 42L, 42M, and 42R to the steady rotation. This makes it possible to create priority information for irregular pushing by effectively using the period during which the reel acceleration process is executed.

(Reel stop processing when pressing irregularly)
Next, differences in the reel stop process will be described.

  In the first stop slip number acquisition process of step S1101 in the first stop process (FIG. 25), the stop reel information stored in the stop reel specifying buffer 184 of the RAM 153 is not information of the left reel 42L, so in step S1201 A negative determination is made, and the processing of steps S1207 to S1208 is executed.

  In step S1207, the second stop and subsequent slip number acquisition processing is executed. Since this process has already been described, the description thereof is omitted here. In step S1208, a stop position setting process is executed (a function for executing the process constitutes a stop partition area determination unit). In the stop position setting process, a stop symbol number is calculated based on the number of slips acquired in the second stop and subsequent slip number acquisition process in step S1207, and the stop position of the RAM 153 is set with the calculated stop symbol number as stop position information. Stored in the buffer 185.

  In step S1103 in the first stop process, since the stop reel information stored in the stop reel specifying buffer 184 of the RAM 153 is not information of the left reel 42L, a negative determination is made. Thereby, the process of step S1104 and step S1105 is performed.

  In step S1104, priority line change processing is executed to change the priority line. When the first stop target is the left reel 42L, the priority line change process is not executed in the first stop process, whereas when the first stop target is other than the left reel 42L, the first stop process has priority. In the former case, the line change process is executed because the priority line is acquired in correspondence with the stop symbol number of the first stop target reel in the first stop slip number acquisition process in step S1101. In the latter case, the priority line is acquired in the irregular pressing priority order information generation process in the reel rotation process, and the priority line does not correspond to the stop symbol number of the first stop target reel.

  In step S <b> 1105, information on the pull-in bit offset used in the priority information generation process for second and subsequent stops to be executed in the future is stored in the pull-in bit offset buffer 187 of the RAM 153. The pull-in bit offset is set in correspondence with the reel that is the first stop target when the irregular push is performed. Further, the lead-in bit offset is set in correspondence with the gaming situation of the slot machine 10, and is further set in correspondence with each combination in each gaming situation.

  Except for the differences described above, in the first stop process, the same process as when the left reel 42L stops as the first stop is executed. That is, in step S1106, the priority information generation process for second and subsequent stops is executed, and priority information is generated for reels for which a stop command has not yet been issued. Further, in the second stop process and the third stop process, the same process as when the left reel 42L is stopped as the first stop is executed. In other words, in the second stop process, the number of slips is acquired based on the priority information created in the first stop process, the stop position of the second stop target reel is set, and a stop command has not yet been issued. Priority information is created for. In the third stop process, the number of slips is acquired based on the priority information created in the second stop process, and the stop position of the third stop target reel is set. Therefore, when the reels other than the left reel 42L are stopped as the first stop, the number of slips is obtained from the priority order information for all the reels 42L, 42M, and 42R, and the stop position is set.

  However, the second stop and subsequent priority order information creation processing at the time of irregular pressing is specific to the determination value calculation information creation processing regarding the unfair prize winning processing in steps S1807 to S1810 and the kicking processing in steps S1827 to S1830. Execute the process. Therefore, a unique process among these processes will be described.

  First, the unfair winning process will be described. In the case of the second stop and subsequent priority information generation processing at the time of irregular pressing, the current target reel may be the left reel 42L, and the “cherry” symbol of the left reel 42L may be on the current search line. In such a case, an affirmative determination is made in step S1806, and the illegal winning process in steps S1807 to S1810 is executed. This unreasonable winning process is as described above. In such a situation, the unreasonable winning of the cherry role is prevented by executing the unreasonable winning process.

  As described above, even if the number of stop commands issued has not reached two, if the target reel is the left reel 42L and the “cherry” symbol of the left reel 42L is on the search line, an unfair winning prize The reason for executing the processing is that the cherry winning is established only by stopping the “cherry” symbol of the left reel 42L on the active line, and is not related to the result of stopping the other reels 42M and 42R.

  Next, the kicking process will be described. In the case of irregular pressing, as described above, the current target reel may be the left reel 42L, and the “cherry” symbol of the left reel 42L may be on the current search line. In such a case, an affirmative determination is made in step S1826, and the kicking process in steps S1827 to S1830 is executed. The kicking process is as described above.

  Even if the number of reels for which a stop command has been issued has not reached two, if the target reel is the left reel 42L and the “cherry” symbol of the left reel 42L is on the search line, the kicking process is executed. The reason is as follows. That is, when the cherry combination is set as the lottery combination, the cherry winning is established only by stopping the “cherry” symbol of the left reel 42L on the active line. In this case, for example, the “cherry” symbol of the left reel 42L is prevented from stopping on the active line as much as possible in the situation where the cherry role is not set as the winning combination as in the BB game. This is because if the “Cherry” symbol of the left reel 42L is stopped on the active line but the cherry prize is not established, the player will be confused. In addition, it is set as the appearance of the reach that the combination of symbols corresponding to the combination that is the subject of the lottery is established on the ineffective line (including at least the subline SL1). In this case, if the “cherry” symbol of the left reel 42L is stopped on the ineffective line in the BB non-winning situation, it means that the reach eye appears.

(Description of each bit allocated to determination value calculation information buffer B)
As described above, in the slot machine 10, priority order information basically created after the start of rotation of the reels 42L, 42M, and 42R except for the left reel 42L when the left reel 42L stops as the first stop. Based on this, the stop position of each reel is set. In such a configuration, a plurality of types of bits are set in each determination value calculation information buffer B constituting the priority order information as described above (see FIG. 29B). Each of these multiple types of bits has a characteristic function, and the allocation order of the multiple types of bits within 2 bytes is also characteristic. Therefore, each bit assigned to the determination value calculation information buffer B will be described below.

  As described above, the determination value calculation information buffer B includes the first buffer B1 as the upper information buffer and the second buffer B2 as the lower information buffer. The priority determination value becomes larger as “1” is stored in the first buffer B1 than in the second buffer B2. Further, when the first and second buffers B1 and B2 are viewed individually, the priority determination value becomes larger as “1” is stored in the upper bits in the buffers B1 and B2.

  In such a configuration, the first buffer B1 is assigned with a wrong winning determination bit, a replay bit, a BB combination bit, a small combination bit, and an acquired number of bits, as viewed from the upper side. In addition, a kick determination bit, a first priority line bit, a pull-in bit, and a second priority line bit are assigned to the second buffer B2 when viewed from the upper side.

  By assigning the unreasonable winning determination bit to the top, the priority determination value of the symbol in which the unreasonable winning is generated can be set to the minimum value for other symbols. That is, as described above, “1” is stored as the initial value in the unfair winning determination bit, and at least the unfair winning determining bit is cleared for the target symbol number where the unfair winning occurs. Therefore, in the determination value calculation information buffer B for the symbol number where an unfair win occurs, at least the highest value is “0”, and the priority order determination value is the minimum for the symbol number where no unfair winning occurs. Thereby, when the number of slips is acquired, it is avoided that the symbol number in which an unreasonable prize is generated stops, and an unreasonable prize can be reliably prevented.

  The replay bit, the BB role bit, and the small role bit (hereinafter also referred to as a winning combination bit) corresponding to the winning combination are assigned next to the unfair winning determination bit, that is, the winning combination bit excludes the inappropriate winning determination bit. Therefore, the symbol number where a winning occurs and the priority determination value of the symbol number constituting the winning can be increased with respect to other symbol numbers. Thereby, in the reel stop control in the slot machine 10, the generation of a winning is surely given priority, and the player's profit is secured.

  In the winning combination bit, a bit is individually assigned to each of the replay, the BB combination, and the small combination. As a result, in the priority determination value, the symbol number where the re-game winning is generated, the symbol number where the winning of the BB role is generated, and the symbol number where the winning of the small role is generated are different from each other. The symbol can be stopped corresponding to each winning combination in the winning situation.

  The winning combination bits are assigned in the order of a replay bit, a BB combination bit, and a small combination bit as viewed from the upper side. Thus, for example, when the re-game role and the BB role are won at the same time, the re-game role winning is given priority, and when the BB role and the small role are simultaneously winning, the BB role winning is given priority. The Specifically, in the case of winning the watermelon in the BB winning situation, if the BB winning can be established, the establishment of the BB winning is given priority even if the watermelon winning is possible. The On the other hand, if the BB prize cannot be established and the watermelon prize can be established, the watermelon prize is established.

  When the winning number bit is assigned, if a small role is won for multiple roles at the same time, the symbol number priority judgment value that causes the winning of a small role with a large payout number is small with a small payout number. It becomes larger than the priority order judgment value of the symbol number where the winning of the combination occurs. Therefore, the winning of a small role with a large number of payouts is given priority and the player's profit is secured.

  In addition, as described above, the payout number corresponding to the winning combination is detected every time a symbol number in which a winning combination of the winning combination is detected in the winning determination process, as described above. Number information is added. Therefore, priority is given to a stoppage that is advantageous to the player.

  Specifically, for example, in the situation where a watermelon role is won, as shown in FIG. 54A, when the 14th “watermelon” symbol stops at the lower stage of the left reel 42L, the left reel 42L The "watermelon" symbol will stop at the upper and lower stages. In such a situation, as shown in FIG. 54 (b), the acquired number information of the 12th symbol that causes the “watermelon” symbol to stop in the middle stage in the middle reel 42M is shown in the lower stage as shown in FIG. 54 (c). The “watermelon” symbol is larger than the acquired number information of the 13th symbol that will be stopped. That is, the former has a higher priority determination value than the latter. Therefore, the stop event shown in FIG. 54 (b) has priority over the stop event shown in FIG. 54 (c). Here, in the case of the stop result shown in FIG. 54 (c), it is necessary to stop the “watermelon” symbol of the right reel 42R in the lower stage in order to establish a watermelon winning. On the other hand, when the stop outcome shown in FIG. 54 (b) is reached, a watermelon winning can be established by stopping the “watermelon” symbol of the right reel 42R at either the upper stage or the lower stage. Therefore, by setting the acquired number bit so that the stoppage shown in FIG. 54 (b) is given priority, the winning result is invalidated without winning a watermelon winning despite winning the watermelon role. It is possible to reduce the frequency of occurrence of missing items.

  The priority order of the symbol number when the kicked eye appears rather than the symbol number when the illegally winning prize occurs due to the allocation of the illegal winning judgment bit and the kicking judgment bit as described above. The judgment value can be increased. Thereby, when either the occurrence of an unfair winning prize or the appearance of a kicked eye cannot be avoided, the appearance of the kicked eye can be prioritized.

  Specifically, in a situation where none of the roles is won, the middle reel 42M and the right reel 42R are stopped, and as shown in FIG. 55 (a), the “youth” symbol is displayed on the main line ML1. The case where two are arranged is assumed. In this case, in the third stop, when the stop operation is performed at the timing when the “bell” symbol No. 8 reaches the lower stage of the left reel 42L, the stop events of FIGS. 55 (b) to 55 (f) are displayed. is assumed.

  In such a situation, in FIG. 55 (b), three “youth” symbols are arranged on the main line ML 1, which results in an unfair prize. In FIG. 55 (c), the “cherry” symbol stops on the main line ML1 and the main line ML2 in the left reel 42L. In FIG. 55D, since the “cherry” symbol stops on the subline SL1 in the left reel 42L, this is the appearance of a kicking eye in the slot machine 10. In FIG. 55 (e), since the “cherry” symbol stops on the main line ML3 and the main line ML4 in the left reel 42L, this results in an unfair win. In FIG. 55 (f), since the “watermelon” symbol, the “young” symbol, and the “young” symbol are arranged on the main line ML 1, this is the appearance of the kicking eye in the slot machine 10.

  In this case, if the priority determination value of the symbol number when an unfair winning is generated and the priority determination value of the symbol number when a kicked eye appears are the same, FIG. 55 (b) to FIG. All of (f) have the same priority determination value. In the slot machine 10, when the priority determination values are the same, the symbol with the smaller number of slips is stopped with priority, so the stop result of FIG. 55 (b) is reached and the BB role is unfairly won. End up.

  On the other hand, since the unfair winning determination bit and the kick determining bit are allocated as described above, the kicked eye appears more than the symbol number when the unfair winning occurs as described above. In this case, the priority order judgment value of the symbol number increases. Therefore, the stop appearance in the cases of FIGS. 55 (d) and (f) is prioritized over the cases of FIGS. 55 (b), (c), and (e), and the occurrence of unfair winnings can be prevented. That is, in the present slot machine 10, a reach may be displayed as a result of avoiding an unfair winning.

  The kick determination bit is as already described. The kick determination bit is assigned to be lower than the acquired number of bits bit. Thereby, when a plurality of small combinations are won at the same time, it is possible to prevent a small combination winning with a small number of payouts from occurring in order to avoid the appearance of kicked eyes.

  Specifically, in a situation where the combined role of the cherry role and the watermelon role is won, the irregular reel is pressed to stop the middle reel 42M and the right reel 42R, and as shown in FIG. It is assumed that two symbols are arranged and “red 7” symbol and “youth” symbol are arranged in the middle. In this case, when the stop operation is performed at the timing when the “watermelon” symbol 0 reaches the lower stage of the left reel 42L in the third stop, a winning combination of watermelon is given as shown in FIG. 56 (b). Further, as shown in FIG. 56 (c), it is possible to win a cherry role. When a watermelon winning combination occurs, the number of payouts is six. On the other hand, when a winning of the cherry role occurs, a winning occurs in each of the main line ML1 and the main line ML2, so the payout number is 8.

  In such a situation, as shown in FIG. 56 (c), when the winning of the cherry role occurs, the “white 7” symbol, the “red 7” symbol, the “youth” symbol are arranged on the subline SL1, and the kicked eyes appear. End up. In this case, assuming that the kick determination bit is assigned to be higher than the acquired number of bits, the “watermelon” design of the number 0 on the left reel 42L is more than the “replay” design of the number 1 Since the priority determination value becomes large, the winning of the watermelon role is given priority. In this case, since 6 medals are given priority over 8 medals, the profit that should have been originally obtained for the player has been lost. On the other hand, since the kick determination bit is assigned to be lower than the acquired number of bits as described above, the 1st “replay” design of the left reel 42L is more than the 0th “watermelon” design. The priority judgment value becomes larger, and the winning of the cherry role is given priority. Thus, the player's profit is secured.

  By assigning the first priority line bit, when a winning combination of any of the combinations has occurred, the stop of the symbol corresponding to the winning combination on the priority line is given priority. In addition, since the first priority line bit is assigned to be lower than the acquired number of bits, the effect of assigning the acquired number of bits can be reliably achieved. That is, assuming that the first priority line bit is assigned to be higher than the acquired number of bits, when the priority line is the main line ML3 in the situation shown in FIG. 54, FIG. The stop event shown in FIG. 5 is prioritized over the stop event shown in FIG. This is because the double tempering of the “watermelon” symbol does not occur and the above-described effects cannot be achieved.

  By assigning the first priority line bit to be lower than the kick determination bit, it is possible to prevent a kick eye from appearing when a winning of the cherry role occurs in the BB non-winning situation. can do.

  Specifically, when the cherry role is won in the BB non-winning situation, as shown in FIG. 57 (a), the middle reel 42L and the right reel 42R are stopped, and “bell” is displayed on the subline SL1. Patterns may be lined up. In this case, if the stop operation is performed at the timing when the first “replay” symbol reaches the lower stage of the left reel 42L in the third stop, the “cherry” symbol is displayed as shown in FIG. A case where a cherry winning combination occurs when stopped at the upper stage of the left reel 42L, and a case where a cherry winning combination occurs when the “cherry” symbol stops at the lower stage of the left reel 42L as shown in FIG. 57 (c). You could think so.

  In such a situation, when the priority line is the main line ML4, “1” is stored in the first priority line bit of the third symbol where the “cherry” symbol stops in the lower row, and the “cherry” symbol is placed in the upper row. “1” is not stored in the first priority line bit of the first symbol to be stopped. However, when the 3rd symbol stops at the lower stage, as shown in FIG. 57 (c), “bell” symbols are aligned on the subline SL1, and a kicked eye appears in the slot machine 10. Therefore, the kick determination bit of the third symbol is cleared.

  In this case, assuming that the first priority line bit is assigned to be higher than the skip determination bit, the priority determination value of the third symbol is higher than the priority determination value of the first symbol. The stop appearance shown in FIG. 57 (c) is given priority. Then, kicked eyes will appear. On the other hand, since the first priority line bit is assigned to be lower than the kick determination bit, the priority determination value of the first symbol is larger than the priority determination value of the third symbol. Therefore, priority is given to the stop appearance shown in FIG. Thereby, the appearance of kicking eyes can be prevented.

  The pull-in bit is as already described. In addition, since the lead-in bit is assigned lower than the first priority line bit, the priority determination value of the symbol related to the winning combination winning is larger than the priority determination value of the symbol not related to the winning winning combination. It is possible to prioritize winning prizes. In addition, since the second priority line bit is assigned, when a predetermined symbol combination such as a reach eye is stopped, priority is given to the stop of the symbol combination on the priority line.

(Medal payout process)
Next, the medal payout process in step S605 in the normal process (FIG. 18) will be described based on the flowchart in FIG.

  In the medal payout process, first, it is determined whether or not the payout number counted by the payout number counter in step S2801 matches the planned payout number stored in the payout planned number storage area. If the number of payouts does not match the planned payout number, it is determined in step S2802 whether the count value of the credit counter has reached the upper limit (the number of stored medals is 50). If the upper limit has not been reached, 1 is added to each of the count value of the credit counter and the number of payouts in steps S2803 and S2805. After that, in step S2806, display unit change processing is performed in which the credit display unit 35 and the acquired number display unit 37 are each incremented by one.

  On the other hand, when the count value of the credit counter reaches the upper limit in step S2802, the medal payout rotating plate is driven in step S2804 to pay the medal from the hopper device 91 to the medal tray 18 through the medal discharge port 17. put out. In the subsequent step S2805, 1 is added to the number of payouts according to the medal detection signal of the payout detection sensor 91a attached to the hopper device 91. Thereafter, in step S2806, display unit change processing for adding 1 to the number of acquired number display unit 37 is performed. After performing a display part change process in step S2806, it returns to step S2801 again. If the number of payouts matches the number of payouts in step S2801, it is determined in step S2807 whether the current gaming state is a bonus game. If it is not a bonus game, the process proceeds to step S2809, and after the payout end process is performed, this process is ended. In the payout end process, the payout amount storage area and the payout counter value are cleared to “0”. Note that the value of the acquired number display section 37 is cleared when a medal is bet to start the next game. If the current gaming state is a bonus game, the payout number is subtracted from the count value of a remaining acquisition number counter described later in step S2808, and the number of remaining acquisition number display unit 36 is subtracted. . Thereafter, a payout end process is performed in step S2809, and this process ends. Note that the process of subtracting the number of remaining acquisition number display part 36 may be performed in the display part changing process of step S2806.

(Bonus game processing)
Next, the bonus game process of step S606 in the normal process (FIG. 18) will be described based on the flowchart of FIG.

  Prior to the description of the bonus game process, the bonus game will be described. The BB game is composed of a plurality of RB games. The RB game is composed of 12 JAC games. A JAC game is a game that has a very high probability that a combination of JAC symbols is aligned on an active line, that is, a probability that a JAC winning will be established. When a JAC winning is established in the RB game, the maximum number (15 in this case) of medals is paid out. When the JAC winning is established 8 times, the RB game is ended even before the JAC game is played 12 times. Also, the BB game ends when the number of medals paid out reaches a predetermined number (specifically, 400). When the number of medals paid out reaches a predetermined number during the RB game, not only the BB game but also the RB game is ended. This is a contrivance for suppressing the player's euphoria by giving an upper limit to the number of medals to be paid out during the BB game, and ensuring the soundness of the game. Further, in the present embodiment, a combination of symbols to be transferred to the RB game is not set, and the structure is set to shift to the RB game immediately after the shift to the BB game and immediately after the RB game ends. Therefore, it can be said that the BB game is a game that continuously shifts to the RB game until a predetermined number of medals are paid out.

  In the bonus game process, first, in step S2901, it is determined whether or not the gaming state is a bonus game. When it is not during the bonus game, bonus symbol determination processing shown in steps S2902 to S2905 is performed.

  In this bonus symbol determination process, first, in step S2902, the winning combination determination buffer 181 is referred to determine whether there is any BB winning information. When there is BB winning information, the process proceeds to step S2903, where it is determined whether or not the combination of BB symbols corresponding to the BB winning information has been stopped on the current effective line. finish. On the other hand, when the combination of BB symbols on the current effective line stops, BB start processing is performed in step S2904. In the BB start process, the BB winning information is cleared and the BB setting information is stored to obtain a BB game which is a kind of bonus game. Further, 400 is stored in the remaining acquisition number counter for counting the number of remaining medals that can be paid out during the BB game, and a process of displaying 400 on the remaining acquisition number display unit 36 is performed. Incidentally, whether or not the current gaming state is a bonus game is determined based on the presence or absence of BB setting information. In the subsequent step S2905, an RB start process is performed, and then this process is terminated. In the RB start process, 8 is stored in the remaining JAC winning counter for counting the number of possible JAC winnings, and 12 is stored in the remaining JAC game counter for counting the remaining number of JAC games.

  If it is determined in step S2901 that the gaming state is a bonus game, the process advances to step S2906 to determine whether or not the combination of JAC symbols has stopped on the active line. When the combination of JAC symbols stops on the active line, 1 is subtracted from the value of the remaining JAC winning counter in step S2907. After that, or when the combination of JAC symbols does not stop on the active line in step S2906, one JAC game has been consumed, so that the value of the remaining JAC game counter is decremented by 1 in step S2908. Subsequently, in step S2909, it is determined whether either the remaining JAC winning counter or the remaining JAC game counter has become zero. If any of them is 0, that is, if the JAC winning is achieved 8 times or the JAC game is consumed 12 times, it means that the RB game end condition is satisfied, so in step S2910, the remaining JAC winning a prize. RB end processing is performed to clear the counter and the remaining JAC game counter values. In a succeeding step S2911, it is confirmed whether or not the count value of the remaining acquisition number counter is 0. If it is not 0, it means that the number of medals paid out during the BB game has not reached the predetermined number, and the BB game end condition is not satisfied, so that the process proceeds to step S2912, and the RB start described above is started. After performing the processing, the present processing is terminated.

  If neither the remaining JAC winning counter nor the remaining JAC game counter is 0 in step S2909, that is, if the JAC winning is not yet established 8 times and the JAC game is not consumed 12 times, step S2909 is executed. In S2913, it is confirmed whether the count value of the remaining acquisition number counter is 0 or not. If it is not 0, it means that the number of medals paid out during the BB game has not reached the predetermined number and the end condition for the BB game is not satisfied. On the other hand, when the count value of the remaining acquisition number counter is 0, it means that the BB game end condition is satisfied, and therefore, the special game state end process shown in steps S2914 to S2915 is performed. In the special game state end process, first, in step S2914, the above-described RB end process is performed. After that, in step S2915, a BB end process for appropriately clearing BB setting information, various counters, etc. or performing an ending process is performed, and this process ends. In addition, even when the count value of the remaining acquisition number counter is 0 in step S2911, it means that the BB game end condition is satisfied. Therefore, in step S2915, BB end processing is performed, and this processing ends. To do.

(Description of subline SL1)
In the slot machine 10, the size of each display window 31L, 31M, 31R is such that 3 × 3 = 9 symbols are visible to the player in a state where all the reels 42L, 42M, 42R are stopped. On the other hand, the combination line in the middle horizontal direction connecting the middle symbols of the reels 42L, 42M, and 42R is not set as an effective line. Below, the specific effect which this structure brings about is demonstrated. In order to facilitate understanding, first, a case where the symbol arrangement of the slot machine 10 is applied to a conventional slot machine that sets the middle horizontal line as an effective line will be described.

  Combined winnings that result in winning when the predetermined symbol of each reel stops on the effective line, and if the predetermined symbol of one reel such as the left reel stops on the effective line, the result of stopping the other reels In the case of a slot machine that has a single winning combination regardless of whether or not a winning combination is made, it is necessary to avoid the formation of a combined winning that results in a winning corresponding to a non-winning role in addition to a winning corresponding to a winning combination. Arise.

  Here, consider a case where the lottery result of the combination is a re-game winning and the “replay” symbols of the middle reel 42M and the right reel 42R are stopped in the lower stage.

  In such a case, for example, if the “Replay” symbol No. 1 on the left reel 42L is stopped at the lower stage, the “Cherry” symbol No. 3 will stop at the upper stage. A composite winning that will be established will occur. This results in a contradiction between the winning lottery result and the stop result of each reel 42L, 42M, 42R. Therefore, it is necessary to stop the left reel 42L so that the first “replay” symbol does not stop in the lower stage. However, when the left reel 42 is stopped to avoid the composite winning, the “replay” symbol is arranged on the left reel 42L so that the interval between the same symbols becomes four symbols or less. A game prize will be missed. For example, if the left stop switch 72 is operated while the 18th “red 7” symbol of the left reel 42L has reached the lower stage, in order to establish a re-game prize while avoiding the establishment of a composite prize It is necessary to stop the “replay” symbol of No. 6 instead of No. 1 in the lower stage. However, the left reel 42L can only slide up to a maximum of 4 symbols, and the 6th “replay” symbol cannot be stopped in the lower stage.

  Overtaking based on the avoidance of the composite winning will cause a disadvantage to the player, and there is a concern that the player's superiority cannot be maintained.

  Therefore, when the middle reel 42M or the right reel 42R is stopped before the left reel 42L in order to solve the above problem, a re-game winning is established on the lower right line or the upper line, that is, the left reel 42L A method of setting a priority line so that a replay winning can be established if the “replay” symbol stops in the upper stage can be considered. However, in the symbol arrangement in which the “cherry” symbol and the “replay” symbol are arranged adjacent to each other at the positions of No. 11 and No. 12, an oversight based on avoidance of the composite winning can occur. This is because, when the 12th “replay” symbol is stopped at the upper stage, the 11th “cherry” symbol stops at the active line in the middle horizontal direction, and it is necessary to avoid the composite winning. This is the same even if the priority line is set so that a replay winning is established if the “replay” symbol of the left reel 42L stops in the middle.

  Next, as a method of solving the above problem, it is conceivable to devise the symbol arrangement of the left reel 42L rather than limiting the effective line where the re-game winning is established. For example, it is a device that arranges a no-reward symbol unrelated to a privilege within a range of two upper and lower symbols from the “cherry” symbol of the left reel 42L. With this configuration, the symbols that form a single prize on one active line stop, and the opportunity to stop the symbols that form a combined prize on another active line does not occur. It is possible to maintain the superiority of the player. However, in such a configuration, there is a possibility that a new problem such as impairing the degree of freedom of the symbol arrangement of the left reel 42L may occur. As a result, a problem that the stop appearance of the left reel 42L becomes monotonous may occur.

  On the other hand, in the case of this slot machine 10 in which the combination line in the middle horizontal direction is not set as an effective line, the above problems can be solved. When the middle reel 42M or the right reel 42R is stopped before the left reel 42L, a composite line winning is established by setting a priority line so that a replay winning is established if the “replay” symbol of the left reel 42L stops in the upper stage. This is because it is possible to avoid the occurrence of oversight based on avoidance of establishment. More specifically, when the No. 12 “Replay” symbol is stopped on the upper stage, the No. 11 “Cherry” symbol will stop on the horizontal combination line, but the combination line is an effective line. This is because only the re-game winning is established and the cherry winning is not established. Thus, by not setting the combination line in the middle horizontal direction as an effective line, it is possible to avoid the occurrence of overshooting based on avoidance of composite winnings without reducing the degree of freedom of symbol arrangement of the left reel 42L. Can maintain their superiority. Furthermore, the subline SL1 that is not set as an effective line is provided at a position sandwiched between the combination lines ML2 and ML3 that are set as effective lines, so that the subline SL1 is used as an avoidance line for avoiding the establishment of a composite winning. It can be said that this is possible.

(Explanation of various processing to be performed when reach eyes are displayed)
Next, various processes performed when displaying the reach eyes will be described as an example in the case where the other role is not won in the first BB winning situation, that is, only the first BB is won.

  When only the first BB is won, in the slip table acquisition process S702 of the reel rotation process (see FIG. 19), the address of the slip table shown in FIG. 22 is acquired.

  When the left stop switch 72 is operated as the first stop command, the stop symbol number of the left reel 42L is calculated based on the sliding table shown in FIG. 22, and the left reel 42L is moved so that the stop symbol number stops at the lower stage. Stop. For example, when the left stop switch 72 is operated while the No. 7 “watermelon” symbol has reached the lower stage, the number of slips is set to 0, so the No. 7 is calculated as the stop symbol number, The reel 42L is stopped without sliding. As a result, as shown in FIG. 60 (a), the stop appearance of the left reel 42L is a stop appearance in which the “watermelon” symbol is stopped at the lower stage, the “bell” symbol is at the middle stage, and the “replay” symbol is stopped at the upper stage. In the sliding table, “ML4” is set as the priority line when the arrival symbol number is 7, and “15” is set as the lead-in bit offset. Therefore, the information is stored in the corresponding buffers 186 and 187, Second priority and subsequent priority information creation processing S1106 is performed.

  In the second and subsequent priority order information creation processing S1106 based on the first stop command, determination value calculation information for the middle reel 42M and the right reel 42R is created.

  In the pull-in bit information setting process (see FIG. 32), a pull-in bit table corresponding to the 15th pull-in bit offset is specified. Then, the lower pull-in bit information, the middle pull-in bit information, and the upper pull-in bit information are acquired and stored in the corresponding pull-in bit information search buffer 192.

  FIG. 61 shows the relationship between each symbol number and the pull-in bit information defined in the pull-in bit table specified at this time. The pull-in bit information does not correspond to the symbol type except that the largest “11” is set in the symbol number corresponding to the “watermelon” symbol.

  For example, although “Lucky” symbols are arranged on the 8th and 14th on the middle reel 42M, the 8th drawn bit information is “01” and the 14th drawn bit information is “10”. Here, when the middle reel 42M is stopped at the lower level, the “lucky” symbol stops at the lower level, the “young” symbol stops at the middle level, the “bell” symbol stops at the upper level, and the left reel 42L and the middle reel 42M. No combination of symbols will be formed for winning. On the other hand, when the 14th of the middle reel 42M is stopped at the lower stage, the “lucky” symbol stops at the lower stage, the “bell” symbol stops at the middle stage, the “replay” symbol stops at the upper stage, and the “replay” symbol on the upper line. Are stopped side by side, and “bell” symbols are stopped side by side on the subline SL1. In other words, even when the “lucky” symbol of the middle reel 42M is stopped at the lower stage, the expectation for winning is completely different depending on which of the 8th and 14th stops. Therefore, in the pull-in bit table in the slot machine 10, the pull-in bit information is set not in association with the symbol type but in association with the stop event when each symbol number stops in the lower stage.

  In the subsequent winning determination process (see FIG. 36), since the “red 7” symbol of the left reel 42L has not stopped on the active line, a negative determination is made in step S1813, and a lead-in bit information search process is performed in step S1831. . The determination value calculation information for each symbol number obtained as a result is shown in FIG. The determination value calculation information stored in the first buffer B1 is omitted because it is “10000000” in any symbol number.

  When the middle stop switch 73 is operated as the second stop command, the stop symbol number is calculated using the priority information of the middle reel 42M, and the middle reel 42M is stopped so that the stop symbol number stops at the lower stage.

  For example, when the middle stop switch 73 is operated when the fifth “cherry” symbol of the middle reel 42M has reached the lower stage (that is, when the reaching symbol number is 5), each priority order determination value is the arrival symbol number. From the side, “8084”, “8080”, “8083”, “8082”, and “8080”. In this case, since the priority determination value is the maximum value, the number of slips is specified as “0” and the stop symbol number is calculated as 5. As a result, the middle reel 42M is stopped without sliding, and as shown in FIG. 60B, the “cherry” symbol is stopped at the bottom, the “bell” symbol is stopped at the middle, and the “replay” symbol is stopped at the top. It becomes.

  In the priority line change process (see FIG. 48) in the second stop process, since “red 7” symbols are not stopped side by side on the active line, a negative determination is made in steps S2406 and S2409, and steps S2410 to S2415 are performed. Perform the process. Since the priority line at the stage where this processing is performed is the right-up line ML4 set in the slip table, “FF”, “00”, “ 00 "is stored. Further, the drawn bit information set in the drawn bit table is stored in the drawn bit search buffers 194a to 194c of the middle reel 42M. That is, “10”, “00”, and “00” are stored in order from the bottom in the drawing bit search buffers 194a to 194c of the middle reel 42M (see FIG. 61). In this case, the pull-in bit information composite value becomes “10” only when the search line is the lower line ML3, and the rewrite line is updated to the lower line ML3 in step S2413. As a result, in step S2419, the priority line is changed from the right-up line ML4 to the lower line ML3.

  In the second stop and subsequent priority information generation processing S1106 based on the second stop command, determination value calculation information for the right reel 42R is generated.

  In the pull-in bit information setting process (see FIG. 32), the pull-in bit table corresponding to the 15th pull-in bit offset is specified as in the pull-in bit information setting process based on the first stop command. Then, the lower pull-in bit information, the middle pull-in bit information, and the upper pull-in bit information are acquired and stored in the corresponding pull-in bit information search buffer 192.

  In the subsequent winning determination process (see FIG. 36), since there are two stopped reels, an affirmative determination is made in step S1805. Then, after performing the unfair prize winning process in steps S1807 to S1810, a negative determination is made in step S1813, and the kicking process in steps S1827 to S1830 and the lead-in bit information search process in step S1831 are performed.

  However, when the target symbol numbers are 5, 9, 13, and 17, the "replay" symbols of the reels 42L, 42M, and 42R are stopped side by side on the upper line ML2. For this reason, when each symbol number is a target symbol number, all bits of the determination value calculation information buffer are cleared in the unfair prize winning process, and the process proceeds to step S1832 without executing the lead-in bit information search process. . As a result, in the determination value calculation information buffer B corresponding to each symbol number, “00000000” is stored in both the first buffer B1 and the second buffer B2.

  When the target symbol number is 0, the “watermelon” symbol, “cherry” symbol, and “watermelon” symbol are stopped from the left on the lower line ML3. Since the stop event corresponds to an alternative, that is, a kicking eye, if the number 0 is the target symbol number, the kicking determination bit is cleared to “0” in the kicking processing, and then the pull-in bit information search processing is executed. Then, the process proceeds to step S1832. As a result, the kick determination bit is “0”, and the pull-in bit and the second priority line bit are also “0”. FIG. 62 shows determination value calculation information for each symbol number obtained as a result of the second stop and subsequent priority information creation processing S1106 based on the second stop command.

  When the right stop switch 74 is operated as the third stop command, the stop symbol number is calculated using the priority information of the right reel 42R, and the right reel 42R is stopped so that the stop symbol number stops at the lower stage.

  At this time, the priority order information of the right reel 42R is that the symbol number determination value calculation information that causes the “bell” symbol of the right reel 42R to stop in the middle stage is the symbol number determination value calculation that is the other stop event. It is calculated larger than the information. That is, the judgment value calculation information of No. 19, No. 11, and No. 7 is calculated the largest as “8086”, and the judgment value calculation information of No. 3 and No. 15 is calculated as the second largest as “8084”. . Therefore, regardless of the operation timing of the right stop switch 74, the “bell” symbol of the right reel 42R stops at the middle stage.

  For example, when the right stop switch 74 is operated when the 20th “bell” symbol of the right reel 42R has reached the lower stage (that is, when the reaching symbol number is 20), each priority determination value is the arrival symbol number. From the side, “8080”, “0000”, “8080”, “8083”, and “8084”. In this case, since the priority determination value No. 3 is the maximum value, the number of slips is specified as “4” and the stop symbol number is calculated as No. 3. As a result, the right reel 42R is stopped after sliding four symbols, and as shown in FIG. 60 (c), the “replay” symbol is stopped at the bottom, the “bell” symbol is at the middle, and the “cherry” symbol is stopped at the top. It ’s a big hit. As a result, the “bell” symbols of the reels 42L, 42M, and 42R are stopped side by side on the subline SL1, and the combination of the symbols corresponding to the winning combination is stopped on the subline SL1. Through this, it is possible to teach BB winning. Alternatively, it can be said that it is possible to teach the BB winning through a sense of incongruity that no privilege is given even though the combination of the symbol corresponding to the winning combination is stopped on the combination line.

  According to the embodiment described in detail above, the following excellent effects are obtained.

  The size of the display window is set such that three are visible for each reel 42L, 42M, 42R, and the combination line including the middle position of the left reel 42L, that is, the combination line in the middle horizontal direction is not set as an effective line. The combination line including the upper and lower positions of the left reel 42L, that is, the right lower line ML1, the upper line ML2, the lower line ML3, and the right upward line ML4 can be set as effective lines while the sub line SL1 is used. In this way, by providing the positions where the effective line is set and the positions where the effective line is not set at the positions where the symbols can be visually recognized from the display windows 31L, 31M, 31R, all the positions where the symbols can be visually recognized are used. It is possible to diversify the effective lines as compared with the conventional slot machine configured to be able to set a plurality of effective lines.

  Since the combination line that connects the positions where the symbols can be visually recognized from the display windows 31L, 31M, and 31R is set as an effective line, it is possible to make the player surely know that a winning has been achieved, It is possible to avoid being confused by the player. For example, if a small mountain-shaped combination line connecting “the lower position of the left reel 42L, the middle position of the middle reel 42M, the lower position of the right reel 42R” is set as an effective line, the number of effective lines is set. It is also possible to increase. However, in such a configuration, when a player familiar with a conventional slot machine in which a combination line that connects the positions where the symbols can be visually recognized from the display window is set as an effective line is won, This is because there is a possibility of being confused without being able to grasp what the privilege is given based on.

  Since the combination line including the middle position of the left reel 42L is not set as an effective line, it is possible to minimize the decrease in the number of combination lines that can set the effective line. When the size of the display window is set to be visible for each of the reels 42L, 42M, and 42R, five combination lines connecting the positions where the symbols can be visually recognized can be formed. Here, if the combination line including the upper or lower position of the left reel 42L is not set as an effective line, the upper line (lower line) and the lower right line (upward right line) are not set as effective lines. This is because there are three combination lines that can be set as effective lines. In addition, since the combination line including the middle position of the left reel 42L located at one end of each reel 42L, 42M, 42R is not set as an effective line, the number of combination lines that can set the effective line is reduced. It can be kept to a minimum. This is because if the combination line including the middle position of the middle reel 42M is not set as an effective line, the combination lines that can set the effective line are two lines, an upper line and a lower line.

  The upper and lower positions of the left reel 42L are set as a part of the active line regardless of the number of medals bet. That is, the lower right line ML1 and the upper line ML2 including the upper position and the lower line ML3 including the lower position are set as valid lines regardless of the bet number of medals. By adopting such a configuration, it is possible to reduce the frequency of occurrence of missing in a configuration in which the middle position of the left reel 42L is not set as an effective line. Even if the left stop switch 72 is operated at a timing at which the winning symbol can be stopped at the middle position, the winning symbol is placed on one of the upper or lower positions, that is, on any active line. This is because it can be stopped.

  Further, in the present slot machine 10 having a single winning that is awarded regardless of the result of stopping other reels when the “cherry” symbol of the left reel 42L stops on the active line, the middle position of the left reel 42L A combination line including “” is not set as an effective line. By adopting such a configuration, it is possible to use the subline SL1 as an avoidance line for avoiding the establishment of a composite prize, and it is possible to avoid causing a player to be disadvantaged. As a result, the player's superiority can be ensured. In addition to this, when the “cherry” symbol stops at the upper, middle, and lower positions, a simultaneously visible section is formed in which the “replay” symbol stops at another position visible from the display window 31L. Even if the “cherry” symbol and the “replay” symbol are arranged on the left reel 42L, in the configuration where the combination line including the middle position of the left reel 42L is not set as an effective line, the combined prize is not generated without causing a miss. Establishment can be avoided. Therefore, it is possible to suppress a decrease in the degree of design freedom regarding the symbol arrangement of the left reel 42L, and it is possible to diversify the stop appearance of the left reel 42L.

  When a subline SL1 that is not set as an active line is provided in a range that can be visually recognized through the display windows 31L, 31M, and 31R, and a winning combination is not established in the BB winning situation, a symbol or symbol corresponding to the winning combination is displayed on the subline SL1. The combination can be stopped. By adopting such a configuration, it is possible to concentrate the player on the result of rotation and stop of the reel, and it is possible to suppress the dilution of the impression of actively participating in the game. Certainly, if the auxiliary display unit 15 provides an auxiliary effect suggesting BB winning without stopping the symbol or symbol combination corresponding to the winning combination on the subline SL1, the player can grasp the BB winning. Is possible. However, in such a configuration, there is a possibility that the player's interest may be poured into the result of the auxiliary performance performed in the auxiliary display unit 15, and the predetermined symbol is on the effective line by looking at the changing symbol. There is a possibility that the original feature of the slot machine, that is, operating the stop switch to stop at once, may be impaired. Moreover, since it becomes necessary to confirm the result of the reel stop and the result of the auxiliary effect, there is a concern that the gameability may become complicated. On the other hand, in the present configuration in which the symbol or symbol combination corresponding to the winning combination is stopped on the subline SL1, each of the above concerns can be avoided, and the impression of actively participating in the game is suppressed from diluting. It becomes possible.

  Furthermore, by providing a subline SL1 that is not set as an active line and stopping the symbol or symbol combination corresponding to the winning combination on the subline SL1 as a reach, a game beginner or the like can play a game without noticing BB winning. It is possible to reduce the chance of termination. In a slot machine where all of the combination lines are set as active lines, it is necessary to set a symbol or a combination of symbols that will not win a prize as a reach, and the player cannot detect a BB win unless he / she remembers the reach . In addition, it is possible to stop a symbol or a combination of symbols winning on a predetermined active line as a reach, but in such a configuration, it is necessary to win the winning combination in a game after winning BB. Yes, it is not possible for the player to quickly grasp the BB winning. On the other hand, in the present configuration in which the symbol or symbol combination corresponding to the winning combination is stopped on the subline SL1, each of the above concerns can be avoided. That is, the winning mode such as the bell winning that is seen in the BB non-winning situation can be stopped on the subline SL1 in the game that has won the BB. This is because the subline SL1 is not set as an active line, and it is not necessary to win a winning combination. As a result, it becomes possible to indicate to the player that the BB is won through a sense of incongruity that the privilege is not given even though the winning mode is stopped on the combination line, and the game novice or the like ends the game without noticing the BB winning. It is possible to reduce the chance of being lost.

  A priority order information buffer 189 is provided in the RAM 153 of the main controller 131, and at least in the first stop process and the second stop process, all symbols (all symbols) attached to the reels for which a stop command has not yet been issued. No.) judgment value calculation information was created. At least in the second stop process and the third stop process, the number of symbol slips and the stop symbol number are determined based on the determination value calculation information created in the stop process before the stop process. This eliminates the need for a slide table for at least the reels subject to the second stop command and the third stop command, and reduces the amount of data stored in advance in the ROM 152 for stop control of each reel 42L, 42M, 42R. It becomes possible.

  Further, the determination value calculation information is created based on the stop symbol number of a reel for which a stop command has already been issued. As a result, it becomes possible to change the stop output of the reel to be subsequently stopped by the stop output of the previously stopped reel. As described above, the slip table for the reels that are the targets of the second stop command and the third stop command. It is possible to diversify the stopping outcomes in a configuration that eliminates this need.

  Further, the determination value calculation information is created for all symbols attached to the reels regarding the reels for which a stop command has not yet been issued. Thereby, even if the reaching symbol number is any symbol number, the stop symbol number can be determined using the determination value calculation information. That is, the stop symbol number can be determined based on the determination value calculation information regardless of the operation timing of the stop switch.

  Further, in the configuration having three or more reels 42L, 42M, and 42R as in the slot machine 10, even if a stop command is generated for one reel, the stop command is still generated for a plurality of reels. Even if a stop command is issued for any of the reels for which a stop command has not yet been issued, the stop symbol number can be determined using the determination value calculation information. That is, the stop symbol number can be determined based on the determination value calculation information regardless of the operation order of the stop switches 72 to 74.

  The second stop and subsequent priority information creation processing (FIG. 28) for creating each determination value calculation information of the reels subject to the second stop command or the third stop command is executed. The processing is executed in a situation where the interrupt processing for stopping the reel to be stopped in the processing (FIG. 27) is permitted. In other words, the creation of each determination value calculation information and the deceleration process of the reel to be stopped are performed in parallel. Accordingly, each determination calculation information can be created by effectively using the time required for the reel to be stopped to stop, and the next stop command is enabled after one reel stops. It is possible to reduce the time lag until.

  In addition, the processing time of the priority information generation process for the second and subsequent stops is set to end within a specified period from when the stop command is generated until the reel is slid for the maximum number of symbols and then stopped. For example, assuming that the processing time exceeds a specified period, it is necessary to ensure a long period from when one stop command is generated to when the next stop command becomes valid. In such a case, for the player, since the period from the time when one stop operation is performed until the next stop operation is validated becomes longer, the game may be delayed. On the other hand, according to the configuration of the present embodiment, such inconvenience does not occur.

  In addition, in the normal process (FIG. 18) in which a predetermined series of processes are executed repeatedly when the power is turned on, the priority information generation process for the second and subsequent stops is executed, and the normal process is periodically performed. A process of decelerating the reels 42L, 42M, and 42R is executed in a timer interrupt process (FIG. 14) in which a predetermined series of processes are executed by interruption. The reels 42L, 42M, and 42R are connected to stepping motors 61L, 61M, and 61R, and a predetermined number of pulses (504 pulses) are supplied to the stepping motors 61L, 61M, and 61R, respectively. The reels 42L, 42M, and 42R are configured to make one rotation. In order to stabilize the behavior of the reels 42L, 42M, and 42R during rotation, the timing at which these drive signals are given is determined in advance. In this configuration, for example, assuming a configuration in which processing for decelerating the reels 42L, 42M, and 42R is performed in the normal processing, and priority order information generation processing for the second stop and thereafter is performed in the timer interrupt processing, one drive signal is generated. It is necessary to finish the priority information generation process for the second and subsequent stops from the time of application to the timing of supplying the next drive signal, and the processing time allocated to the priority information generation process is shortened. Also, in such a case, if it takes a long time for the priority information generation process for the second and subsequent stops, it is assumed that the next timer interrupt process will be started when the previous timer interrupt process has not been completed. In this case, the timer interrupt process is continuously performed a plurality of times. If it does so, the timing which gives a drive signal will be overdue, and the behavior of reel 42L, 42M, 42R will become unstable. On the other hand, according to the configuration of the present embodiment, these problems do not occur.

  Between the start of rotation of all the reels 42L, 42M and 42R and before the operation of the stop switches 72 to 74 is validated, the middle reel 42M and the right reel 42R are for the first stop (for irregular pressing) Each judgment value calculation information was created. Further, as described above, each determination value calculation information is created for the reel that can be the target of the second stop command and the third stop command. That is, no slip table is required for the intermediate reels 42M and 42R, and the amount of data stored in advance in the ROM 152 for stop control of the reels 42L, 42M, and 42R can be reduced.

  Anomaly pushing priority order information creation processing (FIG. 52) for creating judgment value calculation information for the right reels 42M and 42R for the first stop is started in the reel rotation processing (FIG. 19). 23) is executed in a permitted situation. That is, the creation of each determination value calculation information for each reel 42M, 42R for the first stop and the acceleration process for the reels 42L, 42M, 42R are performed in parallel. This makes it possible to create each determination value calculation information for each reel 42L, 42M, 42R for the first stop by effectively using the time required for the acceleration of the reels 42L, 42M, 42R to be completed. It is possible to reduce the time lag from when the acceleration of the reels 42L, 42M, 42R is completed until the first stop command is validated.

  In addition, in the normal process (FIG. 18), which starts when the power is turned on and the predetermined series of processes is repeatedly executed, the irregular push priority information creation process is executed, and periodically interrupts the normal process. A process of accelerating the reels 42L, 42M, and 42R is executed in a timer interrupt process (FIG. 14) in which a predetermined series of processes is executed. For example, assuming a configuration in which processing for accelerating the reels 42L, 42M, and 42R is performed in normal processing, and irregular push priority information creation processing is performed in timer interrupt processing, the next driving is performed after one driving signal is given. It is necessary to finish the irregular pressing priority information generation process by the timing of giving a signal, and the processing time allocated to the priority information generation process is shortened. Also, in such a case, if it takes a long time for the priority pushing priority information creation process, it is assumed that the next timer interrupt process will start in the situation where the previous timer interrupt process has not ended, in this case, Timer interrupt processing is performed continuously several times. If it does so, the timing which gives a drive signal will be overdue, and the behavior of reel 42L, 42M, 42R will become unstable. On the other hand, according to the configuration of the present embodiment, these problems do not occur.

  In each priority order information creation process, each judgment value calculation information is only created by storing “0” or “1” in each bit of each judgment value calculation information buffer B. The calculation and the calculation of each sliding number for each symbol number are performed after a corresponding reel stop command is issued. For example, in the priority order information creation process, not only each judgment value calculation information is created, but each priority order judgment value is calculated and each number of threads is calculated for each symbol number. In this case, however, the processing time required for the priority information creation process becomes extremely long, and accordingly, the time from when one stop command is issued until the next stop command becomes valid is extremely long. There is a risk. On the other hand, according to this configuration, it is possible to shorten the processing time required for the priority order information creation process as much as possible, and to create each judgment value calculation information before the corresponding reel stop command is generated. In the above configuration, it is possible to reduce the time lag from when one reel stops to when the next stop command becomes valid.

  In particular, since the priority order judgment value is calculated after the corresponding reel stop command is generated, the reaching symbol number and the symbols within the range from the reaching symbol number to the maximum number of slips (four symbols) are included. It is only necessary to calculate each priority order determination value for the number, and it is not necessary to calculate priority order determination values for all symbol numbers. Thereby, it is possible to shorten the processing time for the calculation of the priority order determination value.

  A determination value calculation information buffer B is provided in the RAM 153 of the main control device 131 in a one-to-one correspondence with each symbol number of each reel 42L, 42M, 42R, and each determination value calculation information creation process (FIG. 30) “0” or “1” is stored in each bit of the determination value calculation information buffer B. Then, the priority order determination value is calculated based on the determination value calculation information buffer B in which “0” or “1” is stored in each bit. That is, by storing “0” or “1” in the determination value calculation information buffer B in the determination value calculation information generation process, the determination value calculation information is generated, and the priority determination value is calculated based on the determination value calculation information. Thereby, it is possible to satisfactorily perform creation of determination value calculation information and calculation of priority determination values in consideration of various situations.

  Each determination value calculation information buffer B is configured in units of 2 bytes. Thereby, each priority order judgment value can be calculated by a predetermined specific process, and the processing configuration can be simplified. In addition, the processing load can be reduced as compared with the configuration in which the priority order is determined in bit units.

  An unfair prize determination of the determination value calculation information buffer B corresponding to a symbol number that will cause an illegal prize when an illegal prize determination bit is assigned to each judgment value calculation information buffer B and actually stopped at a specified position. “0” is stored in the bit, and “1” is stored in the unfair winning determination bit of the determination value calculation information buffer B corresponding to the symbol number in which no unfair winning occurs. As a result, the priority determination value of the symbol number in which the unfair winning is generated becomes smaller than the priority determination value of the symbol number in which the unfair winning does not occur, and the occurrence of the unfair winning can be avoided.

  In particular, an unfavorable winning determination bit is assigned to the most significant bit in each determination value calculation information buffer B, and the higher the bit is stored in each determination value calculation information buffer B, the higher the priority order determination. Increased the value. This makes it possible to minimize the priority order determination value of the symbol number at which an unfair winning occurs, and to reliably prevent the unfair winning from occurring.

  In the unfair winning determination bit, “1” is stored in the initial state. As a result, in the determination value calculation information creation process, the illegal prize determination bit of the symbol number where the illegal prize is generated may be cleared with respect to the illegal prize determination bit. Since there are fewer cases where it is determined that an unreasonable prize will occur than when it is determined that no unreasonable prize will occur, storing “1” in the initial state will cause an unreasonable prize in the determination value calculation information creation process. The processing time related to the determination bit can be shortened.

  In the winning determination process (FIG. 36) of the determination value calculation information creation process, the process related to the unfair winning determination bit is executed at an early stage, and the subsequent winning determination process is not executed for the symbol number determined that the unfair winning occurs. I did it. Thereby, in the determination value calculation information creation processing, the processing time relating to the unfair winning determination bit is shortened.

  A kick determination bit is assigned to each determination value calculation information buffer B, and a kick determination of the determination value calculation information buffer B corresponding to a symbol number that causes a kick eye to appear when actually stopped at a specified position. “0” is stored in the bit, and “1” is stored in the kick determination bit of the determination value calculation information buffer B corresponding to the symbol number where the kicked eye does not appear. Thereby, the priority determination value of the symbol number where the kicked eye appears is smaller than the priority determination value of the symbol number where the kicked eye does not appear, and the appearance of the kicked eye can be avoided.

  In particular, in the slot machine 10, a subline SL1 that is not related to winning is set at a position that can be visually recognized through the display windows 31L, 31M, and 31R, and the so-called reach eye corresponds to a winning combination on the subline SL1. The selected symbol or combination of symbols is stopped. By adopting such a configuration, it is possible to indicate that the BB is won through a sense of incongruity that a privilege is not given even though a symbol or a combination of symbols for which a winning is established is formed. On the other hand, if the symbol or symbol combination corresponding to the role is stopped on the subline SL1 in the BB non-winning situation, the symbol or symbol combination corresponding to the symbol is not on the BB winning situation and is visible. However, the player may misunderstand that a privilege such as a medal payout is not granted. On the other hand, since the kick determination bit is assigned to the determination value calculation information buffer B, and the above-mentioned stoppage is avoided in the BB non-winning situation, the occurrence of the above misunderstanding is suppressed. It becomes possible.

  In a slot machine in which a subline SL1 that is not set as an effective line is provided, and a symbol or symbol combination corresponding to a winning combination is stopped on the subline SL1 as a reach, the number of symbol slips based on determination value calculation information including kick determination information And the stop symbol number was decided. With this configuration, it is possible to suitably reduce the amount of data stored in advance regarding the stop control of the reels 42L, 42M, and 42R. In the configuration in which the reels 42L, 42M, and 42R are controlled to stop using the sliding table, in addition to the sliding table for stopping the symbol or the combination of symbols to be a winning combination on the effective line, the symbol is displayed on the subline SL1. Alternatively, it becomes necessary to store a sliding table for stopping the combination of symbols, and there is a concern about an increase in the amount of data. On the other hand, in the present configuration in which reel stop control is performed based on determination value calculation information including kick determination information, kick mask information used in a BB winning situation and kick mask information used in a BB non-winning situation Are stored, and the kicking process is performed using the mask information corresponding to each situation, so that each of the above sliding tables becomes unnecessary. Therefore, it is possible to suitably reduce the amount of data stored in advance regarding the stop control of the reels 42L, 42M, and 42R. Furthermore, since it is possible to determine the presence or absence of reach eyes depending on whether or not the kick determination bit is cleared, it is possible to stop the symbol or symbol combination that will be awarded on the subline SL1 with a relatively simple processing configuration. Can do.

  In the kick determination bit, “1” is stored in the initial state. Thereby, in the determination value calculation information creation process, the kick determination bit of the symbol number in which the kick eye appears may be cleared with respect to the kick determination bit. Since there are fewer cases where it is determined that a kicked eye appears than when a kicked eye does not appear, storing “1” in the initial state makes it possible to perform a kicking determination in the determination value calculation information creation process. The processing time for bits can be shortened.

  An incorrect winning determination bit is assigned to each determination value calculation information buffer B and a kick determination bit is assigned. Thereby, it is possible to make a difference between the priority determination value of the symbol number that causes an unfair win and the priority determination value of the symbol number that causes a kick eye to appear.

  In particular, since the unfair winning determination bit is assigned higher than the kick determining bit, the priority order of the symbol number in which the kicked eye appears rather than the priority determination value of the symbol number in which the unfair winning occurs. The judgment value can be increased. Thereby, when either the occurrence of an unfair winning prize or the appearance of a kicked eye cannot be avoided, the appearance of the kicked eye can be prioritized. Therefore, it is possible to reliably prevent an unfair prize from occurring.

  In the winning determination process of the determination value calculation information creation process, the process related to the unfair winning determination bit and the kick determination bit is executed when there is one reel for which no stop command has been issued. Thereby, in each determination value calculation information creation process, it is possible to shorten the processing time related to the unfair winning determination bit and the kick determination bit, and to suppress the monotonization of the stop appearance. In other words, in a situation where there are a plurality of reels for which no stop command has been issued, in order to create determination value calculation information for all the symbol numbers of these reels, processing for the unfair winning determination bit and kick determination bit is executed. This leads to an increase in length. In addition, when the processing related to the unfair winning determination bit and the kick determination bit is executed in the above situation, it is avoided that two symbols corresponding to the winning combination are not arranged on the active line, and the stop appearance is extremely limited. Because it will be done.

  In addition to this, in the winning determination process of the determination value calculation information creation process, the processing related to the unfair winning determination bit and the kick determination bit is the left reel 42L at the time of irregular pressing, and the “cherry” symbol is displayed on the search line. Executed in some cases. In this situation, by executing the unfair winning process, it is possible to prevent an unfair winning of the cherry role. In addition, by executing the process for unfair winning a prize in such a situation, a reach where the “cherry” symbol of the left reel 42L stops is displayed on the subline SL1 under the non-winning situation of the BB, for example, as in the BB game It is possible to reduce the chance that the “cherry” symbol of the left reel 42L stops on the active line under the situation where the winning combination is not set as the winning combination. Therefore, in this slot machine 10 provided with the subline SL1 that is not set as an active line, it is possible to play a game without confusing the player as much as possible.

  A winning combination bit is assigned to each determination value calculation information buffer B, and when it is actually stopped at a specified position, a winning is generated or a possibility of winning is determined in the determination value calculation information buffer B corresponding to the symbol number. “1” is stored in the winning combination bit. As a result, information on whether or not a winning has occurred is reflected in the priority order judgment value, and the process for grasping the winning combination after the stop command is generated and the symbol corresponding to the winning combination is stopped on the active line to win There is no need to perform a separate process for generating the error. In other words, in the process of stopping the reel corresponding to the stop command, it is only necessary to compare the priority order judgment value regardless of the result of the lottery process, and the symbol corresponding to the winning combination is stopped on the active line and a prize is generated. Even if it is necessary to make it stop, the stop symbol number can be calculated in a relatively short time.

  Also, in each determination value calculation information buffer B, the winning combination bit is assigned to the most significant bit excluding the unfair winning determination bit, and “1” is stored in the upper bit in each determination value calculation information buffer B as described above. The priority judgment value was made larger as it was changed. Thereby, the priority determination value corresponding to the symbol number that causes a winning or a possibility of winning can be increased with respect to other symbol numbers. Therefore, in the stop control of the reels 42L, 42M, and 42R in the slot machine 10, the generation of a winning is surely given priority, and the player's profit is secured.

  In the winning combination bit, a bit is individually assigned to each of the replay, the BB combination, and the small combination. Accordingly, the priority determination value of the symbol number that causes the winning of the replay or causes the possibility of winning, the priority determination value of the symbol number that causes the winning of the BB role or causes the possibility of winning, and The reels 42L and 42M are associated with each winning combination in a situation where a winning combination of the small role is generated or the symbol number priority order determination value causing the possibility of winning is different, and a plurality of winning combinations are simultaneously selected. , 42R can be controlled.

  Corresponds to the number of symbols to be paid out for symbol numbers that cause a medal payout or a medal payout possibility when an acquisition number bit is assigned to each judgment value calculation information buffer B and actually stopped at a specified position. The stored information is stored in the acquired number of bits. As a result, when a small combination is won simultaneously for a plurality of winning combinations, a winning combination for a small winning combination with a large number of payouts is generated, or the symbol number priority determination value causing the possibility of winning is increased. Therefore, the winning of a small role with a large number of payouts is given priority and the player's profit is secured. Incidentally, the information corresponding to the payout number is essential information in the slot machine 10 for executing the payout of medals. By storing the information corresponding to the payout number in the acquired number bit, the main controller The amount of data stored in advance in the ROM 152 of 131 can be reduced.

  The acquired number of bits corresponds to each time a medal payout occurrence or a medal payout possibility is detected while searching for each active line in the winning determination process (FIG. 36). Added information on the number of payouts. As a result, for example, when a winning combination is won, it is possible to calculate the stop symbol number so that there is a possibility that a winning will be established on a plurality of active lines. Therefore, it is possible to reduce the chances of missing a prize that is not established despite winning the lottery, and it is possible to secure the player's superiority.

  On the other hand, in the winning determination processing in the irregular pushing priority information creation processing (FIG. 52), even if the possibility of winning is detected for the same winning combination while searching for each active line, The information is not added. Even in such a case, assuming that the information on the number of payouts is added, the acquired number of bits is assigned higher than the priority line bits in each determination value calculation information buffer B. For example, The priority order judgment value of the symbol number at which the symbol corresponding to the winning combination stops at the position where the effective line overlaps (the middle position of the middle reel 42M) becomes larger, and the priority line is substantially the effective line. It will be limited to the effective line which passes through the overlapping position. On the other hand, according to the configuration of the present embodiment, the occurrence of such inconvenience can be suppressed.

  When the first priority line bit is assigned to each judgment value calculation information buffer B and the symbol number corresponding to the winning combination is stopped on the priority line when actually stopped at the specified position, “1” is stored in the first priority line bit of the determination calculation information buffer B. As a result, information indicating whether or not the symbol corresponding to the winning combination is stopped on the priority line in the priority determination value is reflected, and processing for grasping the priority line set after the stop command is generated, In addition, there is no need to separately perform processing for stopping the symbol corresponding to the winning combination on the priority line. In other words, in the process of stopping the reel corresponding to the stop command, it is only necessary to compare the priority order judgment value regardless of the priority line, and the stop symbol number can be calculated in a relatively short time regardless of the setting state of the priority line. Can do.

  A pull-in bit is assigned to each determination value calculation information buffer B, and it is possible to make an appearance of a winning combination including a reach in the BB winning situation or a so-called chance. That is, the priority determination value is not calculated only for the symbol number that generates a winning prize or the symbol number that generates an unfair winning prize, but the priority determination value is calculated even for a symbol number that does not generate any of them, Each of these symbol numbers has a difference in the priority determination value. Therefore, it is possible to diversify the stop appearance. In addition, by reflecting the information of the pull-in bit for each judgment value calculation information, it is not necessary to perform a separate process for making reach eyes appear after the stop command is generated, and the stop symbol number can be set in a relatively short time. Can be calculated.

  In addition, even if no winning combination is won in the lottery process, the drawn bit information composite value is stored in the drawn bits of each determination value calculation information buffer B. Thereby, it becomes possible to diversify the stop appearances under such circumstances, and to suppress the monotonization of the game. Note that the pull-in bit information composite value is calculated based on a pull-in bit table stored in advance in the ROM 152 of the main controller 131. By adopting such a configuration, it is possible to make a stop appearance desired by a designer who designs the slot machine 10.

  In the configuration in which the pull-in bit is allocated to each determination value calculation information buffer B as described above, the second priority line bit is further allocated to each determination value calculation information buffer B. Accordingly, there is no need to prepare a pull-in bit table corresponding to each of the main lines ML1 to ML4. Therefore, the stop bit can be caused to appear corresponding to the priority line, and the pull-in bit table in the ROM 152 is related. It is possible to reduce the amount of data.

  A pull-in bit table is not prepared for situations where a winning combination is won. This makes it possible to reduce the amount of data related to the pull-in bit table in the ROM 152.

(Second Embodiment)
In the present embodiment, the configuration of the determination value calculation information buffer B is different from that of the first embodiment (see FIG. 29B), and further, a prize is awarded according to the configuration of the determination value calculation information buffer B. The processing configuration of the determination process is different. Therefore, these different configurations will be described below. The description of the same configuration as that of the first embodiment is basically omitted.

  First, the configuration of the determination value calculation information buffer B will be described with reference to FIG.

  The decision value calculation information buffer B of the present embodiment has a first buffer B1 and a second buffer B2 as in the first embodiment, and is composed of a total of 2 bytes of 1 byte each. ing. However, some of the functions assigned to each bit of the first buffer B1 are different from those in the first embodiment.

  Specifically, the highest 7th bit in the first buffer B1 has a function as an unreasonable winning determination bit for storing unreasonable winning determination information, and the sixth bit is for storing replay information. It has a function as a replay bit, the fifth bit has a function as a replay priority line bit for storing replay priority line information, and the fourth bit is for storing BB combination information It has a function as a BB combination bit, and the third to 0th bits have a function as an acquired number bit for storing acquired number information.

  That is, in the determination value calculation information buffer B of this configuration, only the replay bit and the BB combination bit are set as the winning combination bit, and the small combination bit is not set. A replay priority line bit is assigned in place of the small combination bit. In the first embodiment, the small combination bit is assigned to a bit lower than the BB combination bit, but the replay priority line bit is allocated to a higher bit than the BB combination bit.

  By the way, even if it is a configuration that does not set the small role bit as described above, the winning number bit is set, so that the priority number judgment value of the symbol number that constitutes the small role winning is set to win any winning combination. It can be made larger than the priority order judgment value of the symbol number that is not configured. That is, in the symbol number constituting the winning of the small role, the obtained number information is stored in the obtained number bit of the determination value calculation information buffer B (“1” is stored in any of the bits constituting the acquired number bit). This is because the priority determination value can be made larger than the symbol number that does not constitute any winning combination.

  Next, the winning determination process of the present embodiment will be described with reference to the flowcharts of FIGS.

  In steps S3001 to S3004, the same processing as in steps S1801 to S1804 in the first embodiment is performed. Thereafter, in step S3005, it is determined whether or not the current search line is an effective line. If it is an effective line, the process proceeds to step S3006. If it is not an effective line, the process proceeds to step S3024 without performing the processes of steps S3007 to S3023. This is because the ineffective line is a line that is not related to winning, and it is not necessary to perform processing related to winning in steps S3007 to S3023.

  In steps S3006 to S3011, the same processing as in steps S1805 to S1810 in the first embodiment is performed. In steps S3012 to S3013, the same processing as in steps S1812 to S1813 in the first embodiment is performed. In the winning determination process of the present embodiment, the process of step S1811 and the processes of steps S1814 to S1815 in the first embodiment are not performed. In steps S3014 to S3015, the same processing as in steps S1816 to S1817 in the first embodiment is performed.

  Thereafter, in step S3016, the winning combination classification buffer 200 in the RAM 153 is referred to and it is determined whether or not the winning classification is re-game information. If it is replay information, “1” is stored in the replay bit of the buffer B for determination value calculation information in step S3017, and then the process proceeds to step S3020. If it is not replay information, the process proceeds to step S3018.

  In step S3018, the winning combination classification buffer 200 is referenced to determine whether or not the winning combination is BB combination information. If it is the BB combination information, “1” is stored in the BB combination bit of the determination value calculation information buffer B in step S3019, and then the process proceeds to step S3020. If it is not BB combination information, the process proceeds to step S3020.

  In step S3020, it is determined whether or not the current search line matches the information of the priority line stored in the priority line buffer 186 of the RAM 153. If they do not match, the process proceeds to step S3024, and if they match, the process proceeds to step S3021.

  In step S3021, the winning combination classification buffer 200 is referred to and it is determined whether or not the winning combination is re-game information. If it is replay information, “1” is stored in the replay priority line bit of the determination value calculation information buffer B in step S3022, and then the process proceeds to step S3024. If it is not replay information, “1” is stored in the first priority line bit of the determination value calculation information buffer B in step S3023, and then the process proceeds to step S3024.

  In steps S3024 to S3032, the same processing as in steps S1825 to S1833 in the first embodiment is performed.

  As described above, the replay priority line bit is set between the replay bit and the BB combination bit in the first buffer B1 of the determination value calculation information buffer B, and further in steps S3021 to S3023 in the winning determination process. By executing the process, regardless of the stop order of the stop switches 72 to 74 and the stop operation timing, the replay winning can be given the highest priority in the situation where the replay is won.

  That is, assuming that the replay priority line bit is not set as described above, when the replay is won in the BB win situation, the replay bit and the BB combination bit in the determination value calculation information buffer B The priority determination value of No. 16 in which “1” is stored in both and becomes larger than other symbol numbers. Therefore, when the middle reel 42M is subjected to the first stop operation, the stop symbol number is easily set to No. 16, and the stop appearance shown in FIG. 66 (a) is likely to occur.

  When the left reel 42L is stopped at the timing when the arrival symbol number is No. 20 (other than this, No. 18 or No. 19) in such a stoppage, the stoppages shown in FIGS. 66B to 66F are performed. Expectation is expected. Of these stop events, the only stop event in which a re-game winning can be established is FIG. 63 (d). In such a stop event, the third “cherry” symbol on the main lines ML1 and ML2 is displayed. Will stop and become an unfair prize. In other words, the stop event in FIG. 66 (d) is avoided. Therefore, in this case, the replay is lost.

  On the other hand, the replay priority line bit is set as in the present embodiment, and the priority line at the time of irregular pressing in the replay win is the upper line main line ML2 as in the first embodiment. For example, the “replay” symbol is stopped on the main line ML2 rather than the symbol number of 16 in which “1” is stored in both the replay bit and the BB combination bit. The priority determination value of the symbol number 20 can be increased. Therefore, the stop appearance shown in FIG. 66 (a) can be avoided, and the occurrence of replay failure can be prevented.

(Other embodiments)
In addition, it is not limited to the description content of each embodiment mentioned above, For example, you may implement as follows.

  (1) In each of the above-described embodiments, the determination value calculation information buffer B is provided in a one-to-one correspondence with the symbol numbers of the reels 42L, 42M, and 42R. Although “0” or “1” is stored in each bit of the buffer B to generate determination value calculation information as stop information, the content of the stop information may be changed.

  For example, a winning / decision determination buffer is provided in a one-to-one correspondence with each symbol number of each reel 42L, 42M, 42R. In addition, before the corresponding reel stop operation is validated, the symbols corresponding to the winning combination are searched for all the symbol numbers of the reel, and the symbol number assigned with the symbol corresponding to the winning combination is a pass / fail judgment buffer. “1” is stored, and “0” is stored in the success / failure determination buffer for the symbol number to which the symbol corresponding to the winning combination is not attached. In such a configuration, when a stop command is issued, the symbol number in which “1” is stored in the success / failure determination buffer is set as the stop symbol number, so that the generation of a prize can be prioritized.

  Further, in order to prevent an unfair winning from occurring in the above configuration, for example, for the reel that is the target of the third stop command, the symbols from the reaching symbol number to the maximum number of slips after the third stop command is generated. A configuration is conceivable in which it is determined whether or not an unreasonable prize is generated for a number, and the symbol number determined to cause an unreasonable prize is not stopped at a specified position.

  (2) Each determination value calculation information buffer B in each of the above-described embodiments may be configured with only the wrong winning determination bit and the winning combination determination bit. The priority determination value of each symbol number is set such that the symbol number where a winning occurs> the symbol number where neither winning nor illegal winning occurs> symbol number causing an illegal winning. Even in such a configuration, when the stop symbol number is calculated after the stop command is generated, the symbol number where the winning occurs is given priority, and the symbol number where the illegal winning is generated is avoided.

  (3) As a mode relating to the stop control of each reel 42L, 42M, 42R, a configuration having both the mode in the above embodiment and the mode shown in the above (1) and (2) may be adopted. For example, when the left reel 42L is operated to stop as the first stop, the first stop to the third stop are all performed in the above-described embodiment, and the operation other than the left reel 42L is stopped as the first stop. In this case, all of the first stop to the third stop may be performed in the manner shown in the above (1) or (2).

  (4) In each of the above-described embodiments, when the target of the first stop command is the left reel 42L, the determination of the stop symbol number of the left reel 42L is made in advance according to the slip stored in the ROM 152 of the main controller 131. Although it is based on the table, even in such a case, the stop symbol number may be determined based on the priority information. With this configuration, no sliding table is required, and the data amount of the ROM 152 can be further reduced with respect to the stop control of the reels 42L, 42M, and 42R.

  In addition, regarding a specific reel such as the left reel 42L, the stop symbol number may be determined based on the sliding table regardless of the order of stop operation. In addition, regarding the reels to be stopped in a specific order such as the first stop command, the stop symbol number may be determined based on the sliding table regardless of which reel. Even with these configurations, the data amount of the ROM 152 can be reduced with respect to the stop control of the reels 42L, 42M, and 42R, compared to the configuration in which the slide table is stored in advance for all reels and all stop operation orders. It becomes possible to plan.

  (5) In each of the above embodiments, when reel stop control is performed based on each determination value calculation information, a priority determination value is calculated after the stop command is generated, and thereafter, based on the priority determination value. Although the number of slips is calculated and the stop symbol number is calculated at the end, this may be changed. For example, the stop symbol number may be calculated instead of calculating the number of slips by comparing the priority determination values. In this case, the processing time from when the stop command is generated until the stop symbol number is calculated can be made shorter than in the above embodiment.

  (6) In the above-described embodiment, the higher the priority number, the higher the priority determination value. However, instead of this, the higher the priority number, the lower the priority determination value. Also good. In such a configuration, in the second stop and subsequent slip number acquisition process (FIG. 46), the symbol number having the smallest priority determination value is set as the stop symbol number among the symbol numbers corresponding to the maximum number of symbols from the reached symbol number. To do. By the way, in this configuration, for a symbol number where an unfair winning occurs, by storing “1” in each bit of the determination value calculation information buffer B, the priority determination value of the symbol number where the unreasonable winning occurs is the largest. Can be the lowest priority. In addition, the maximum value that can be stored is stored in the acquired number of bits in the determination value calculation information buffer B (specifically, all “1” is stored in the third to zeroth bits of the first buffer B1). In other words, every time the number of acquired sheets is calculated, it may be subtracted sequentially.

  (7) In each of the above embodiments, each determination value calculation information buffer B is composed of 2 bytes, but may be composed of 3 bytes or more. However, it is preferable to unify the number of bytes in each determination value calculation information buffer B in order to uniformly calculate the priority order determination values.

  Further, each determination value calculation information buffer B may be composed of 1 byte. However, in this configuration, since the number of bits is smaller than that in the above embodiment, it is necessary to reduce the type of information included in the determination value calculation information as compared to the above embodiment.

  (8) In the above embodiment, in the first stop process (FIG. 25) and the second stop process (FIG. 45), the priority information generation process for the second stop and later is performed in a situation where the interrupt process for stop is permitted. By executing, the reel deceleration process and the creation of each determination value calculation information are performed in parallel, but this may be changed. For example, in the situation where the stop interrupt process is permitted, the determination information calculation information is generated after the reel deceleration process is completed by not performing the priority information generation process for the second and subsequent stops. You may do it. However, in such a configuration, it is necessary to make the time from when one stop command is generated until the next stop operation is validated longer than in the above embodiment.

  (9) In each of the above-described embodiments, the processing time of the priority information creation process for the second and subsequent stops is stopped after the reel is slid after the maximum number of symbols (4 symbols) after the stop command is generated. However, instead of this, the processing time of the second stop and subsequent priority information generation processing may exceed the specified period. However, in such a configuration, it is necessary to make the time from when one stop command is generated until the next stop operation is validated longer than in the above embodiment.

  (10) In each of the embodiments described above, in the reel rotation process (FIG. 19), by executing the irregular pushing priority order information creating process in a situation where the start interrupt process is permitted, the reel acceleration process and the irregular process are performed. Although the creation of each determination value calculation information for pushing is performed in parallel, this may be changed. For example, in the situation where start interrupt processing is permitted, the creation of each determination value calculation information for irregular pushing after the reel acceleration processing is completed by not performing the irregular pushing priority information creation processing May be performed. However, in such a configuration, it is necessary to make the time from when the start command is generated until the first stop operation is validated longer than in the above embodiment.

  (11) In each of the above-described embodiments, the processing time of the irregular pressing priority order information generation processing is finished within the acceleration period from the start of the acceleration processing of each reel 42L, 42M, 42R to the steady rotation. However, instead of this, the processing time of the irregular pressing priority information creation processing may be configured to exceed the acceleration period. However, in such a configuration, it is necessary to make the time from when the start command is generated until the first stop operation is validated longer than in the above embodiment.

  (12) In the above embodiment, in each determination value calculation information buffer B, winnings for small roles such as a watermelon role and a bell role are summarized as small role bits, but bits are set according to the type of each small role. It is good also as a structure to allocate. That is, a watermelon combination bit, a bell combination bit, and a cherry combination bit are allocated to each determination value calculation information buffer B, respectively. In this case, in the priority determination value, a symbol number that causes a win of a watermelon role or causes the possibility of winning, a symbol number that causes a win of a bell role or causes the possibility of winning, and a cherry role A difference can be provided for each of the symbol numbers where the winnings are generated. In such a configuration, the order in which the small combination bits are arranged is higher in the small combination with the larger number of payouts, so that the plurality of small combinations can be simultaneously performed without assigning the acquired number of bits in each determination value calculation information buffer B. When winning, you can prioritize winning a small role with a large number of payouts.

  (13) In each of the above embodiments, all symbols in the determination value calculation information buffer B are cleared to “0” for the symbol number where the unsuccessful winning occurs, but only the unsuccessful winning determination bit is cleared to “0”. It is good also as a structure. Even in such a configuration, since each of the determination value calculation information buffers B is assigned with the most unsuccessful prize determination bit, the priority order determination value of the symbol number at which the unsuccessful prize is generated can be minimized.

  (14) In each of the above embodiments, each of the decision value calculation information buffers B is assigned with an unfair winning decision bit and a kick decision bit. However, the functions of these two bits may be integrated into one bit. In such a configuration, the priority determination value of the symbol number that causes an unfair winning is the same as the priority determination value of the symbol number that causes a kicked eye to appear.

  (15) In each of the above-described embodiments, the pull-in bit table is not provided for a combination that does not cause a miss, but a pull-in bit table may be provided for a combination that causes a miss. In the configuration, even if a winning combination such as re-playing does not occur is won, the drawn bit information composite value is stored in the drawn bits of each determination value calculation information buffer B of each symbol number. Become. In this case, for at least a predetermined reel, a winning combination of the drawn bit information at a predetermined symbol number (first symbol number) that causes a re-game win or a possibility of the win is the next re-game win. May be set so as to be smaller than the combined value of the drawn bit information in the symbol number (second symbol number) that causes the possibility of winning or the possibility of winning. As a result, when the stop switch is stopped at the timing when the first symbol number is the arrival symbol number in the situation where the re-game is won, the second symbol number is calculated as the stop symbol number, The reel will stop after sliding to some extent. For example, by performing such a stop mode only in the BB winning status, it is possible to notify the BB winning status according to the slip mode when the reel stops.

  (16) In each of the embodiments described above, the pull-in bit information composite value is calculated from the pull-in bit table and stored in the pull-in bit of each determination value calculation information buffer B. The drawn bit information set in the bit table may be stored in the drawn bits as they are. Moreover, in the said embodiment, although it was set as the structure which acquires the information of a drawing-in bit table based on the information of a drawing-in bit offset, it is good also as a structure which acquires the information of a drawing-in bit table without going through a drawing-in bit offset.

  (17) The priority line when the irregular push is performed may be the main line ML1 or the main line ML4 regardless of the winning combination. Here, in the winning determination processing (FIG. 36) in the irregular pushing priority information creation processing (FIG. 52), it is assumed that the possibility of winning for the same winning combination is detected while searching for each active line. However, in the configuration in which the priority line when the irregular push is performed as described above is the main line ML1 or the main line ML4 regardless of the winning combination or the like, it is necessary to perform the above processing. Disappear. This is because when the priority line is set to other than the main line ML1 or the main line ML4, the priority line is not substantially limited to the main line ML1 or the main line ML4.

  (18) The arrangement order of the bits in each determination value calculation information buffer B is not limited to the above-described embodiments, and may be another arrangement order.

  (19) The information stored in the acquired number of bits in each determination value calculation information buffer B is not limited to information on the number of payouts, but may be configured to store information corresponding to the number of payouts.

  (20) In each of the above embodiments, a pull-in bit table is stored in advance in the ROM 152 of the main controller 131, a pull-in bit information composite value is calculated based on the pull-in bit table, and the calculated pull-in bit information composite value is Although stored in the pull-in bit of the determination value calculation information buffer B, this may be changed. For example, a configuration without a pull-in bit table may be adopted. Even in such a configuration, the determination value calculation information buffer B can be identified by assigning specific eye bits such as a missed eye in the case of missing, other chance eyes, and reach eyes in the BB winning situation. The priority determination value of the symbol number that causes the eye to appear can be made larger than the priority determination value of the symbol number that becomes the losing eye that does not cause the specific eye to appear (the eye that does not generate a prize). That is, even in a configuration in which no pull-in bit table is provided, it is possible to diversify the stop appearance.

  (21) The symbol arrangement of each reel 42L, 42M, 42R is not limited to that in each of the above embodiments.

  (21-1) For example, it is good also as a symbol arrangement | sequence which a stop appearance as shown in FIG. 67 may appear. Specifically, with respect to the left reel 42L and the middle reel 42M, as shown in FIG. 67A, “replay” symbols are arranged on the main line ML2, and “red 7” symbols and “white” are displayed on the main line ML3. 7 ”is a symbol arrangement in which symbols may be arranged. For the right reel 42R, the symbols with symbol numbers “7” to “12” are “red 7” symbol, “cherry” symbol, “replay” symbol, “bell” symbol, “watermelon” symbol, “replay”. "It is a design.

  In this case, when the reaching symbol number becomes the symbol number 7 in the situation where the re-game is won (the reaching symbol number may be the symbol number 6), a re-game winning is made. As stop events to be generated, a stop event with a stop symbol number of 7 as shown in FIG. 67 (b) and a stop symbol number of 12 as shown in FIG. 67 (c). It can be considered as a stop-out.

  In the situation described above, when the stop event shown in FIG. 67B appears, the “red 7” symbol, the “white 7” symbol, and the “red 7” symbol are arranged on the main line ML3. Since this symbol arrangement is generally an arrangement that constitutes a reach, there is a risk that the player will be mistaken for the appearance of a reach. On the other hand, in the stop control of the reels 42L, 42M, and 42R in each of the above embodiments, the determination value of the seventh symbol number is provided because each determination value calculation information buffer B is provided with a kick determination bit. By storing “0” in the kick determination bit in the calculation information buffer B and storing “1” in the kick determination bit in the determination value calculation information buffer B of the number 10 symbol, the symbol number 7 In addition, the priority determination value of the symbol number 10 can be increased, and the stop event shown in FIG. 67 (c) is prioritized.

  Even in the above configuration, for example, if the stop command for the right reel 42R is generated when the arrival symbol number is the fifth symbol number, the symbol number 10 is to be used as the stop symbol number. The maximum slip number of the reel will be exceeded. In this situation, since “1” is stored in the replay bit in the determination value calculation information buffer B for the 7th symbol number, the stop symbol number becomes the 7th symbol number, and a replay win occurs. The stop event where a replay win occurs is given priority over the non-stop event.

  Incidentally, the appearance of the stop event as described above can be realized by allocating the wrong winning determination bit and the kick determination bit in the determination value calculation information buffer B, respectively. Assuming the case where these two bits are combined as one bit, the symbol number 7 becomes a symbol number where an illegal winning occurs, and when the reaching symbol number is 5, the re-game win This is because a stop game that does not generate a replay win is given priority over a stop game that generates a game.

  (21-2) For example, it is good also as a symbol arrangement | sequence which a stop appearance as shown in FIG. 68 may appear. Specifically, as shown in FIG. 68A, the left reel 42L has a symbol arrangement in which the “watermelon” symbol, “red 7” symbol, and “bell” symbol may stop from the top. For the middle reel 42M, the symbols with the symbol numbers “3” to “6” are the “white 7” symbol, the “bell” symbol, the “cherry” symbol, and the “watermelon” symbol.

  In this case, if the winning combination is a combination of watermelon and bell, and the winning combination is in the situation where the combined role is won, only the winning of the Bell role will occur. It is preferable to use the stop appearance of FIG. 68 (c) in which either a watermelon role or a bell role can be generated, rather than the possible stop appearance of FIG. 68 (b). On the other hand, in each of the above-described embodiments, since the acquired number of bits is assigned higher than the first priority line bit in each determination value calculation information buffer B, the priority line is set to the main line ML4. Even in such a situation, the stop event shown in FIG. 68 (c) has priority over the stop event shown in FIG. 68 (b).

  (22) The types of small roles are not limited to the three types of watermelon role, bell role, and cherry role, and may be configured to have four or more types of small roles. In a configuration in which a large number of small combinations are set in this way, each decision value calculation information buffer B calculates each determination value by assigning a winning bit in a one-to-one correspondence with these small combinations. There is a risk that the amount of data in the information buffer B will increase beyond 2 bytes. On the other hand, in each determination value calculation information buffer B, the winnings of all the small roles are collected as small portion bits. Therefore, even in the configuration in which many types of small roles are set, each determination value calculation information The amount of data in the buffer B does not increase. Even if the winnings of all the small roles are collected as small portion bits in this way, the winning number bits are assigned to each judgment value calculation information buffer B, so It is possible to provide a difference in the priority order judgment value of each symbol number.

  (23) In each of the above embodiments, the size of the display window is set to be visible for each of the reels 42L, 42M, and 42R, and the combination line including the middle position of the left reel 42L is used as an effective line. Although the configuration is not set, the configuration is not limited to this configuration. Therefore, in the following, another configuration that exhibits the same operational effects as the above-described embodiments will be described with reference to FIG.

  As shown in FIG. 69 (a), the display windows 31L, 31M, 31R may be configured so that four reels 42L, 42M, 42R are visible.

  In such a configuration, as a combination line that connects the positions where the symbols can be visually recognized in a straight line, “the first stage of the left reel 42L, the second stage of the middle reel 42M, and the third stage of the right reel 42R. The first main line ML1 in the right-down direction connecting the symbol "and the first symbol of the left reel 42L, the first symbol of the middle reel 42M, the first symbol of the right reel 42R" The first lower-right direction connecting the second main line ML2 in the horizontal direction and the “second-stage symbol of the left reel 42L, the third-level symbol of the middle reel 42M, and the fourth-level symbol of the right reel 42R”. The second sub-line SL2 in the second-stage lateral direction connecting the sub-line SL1 and the “second-stage design of the left reel 42L, the second-stage design of the middle reel 42M, the second-stage design of the right reel 42R”, “ Left reel 42L third stage design, middle reel The third main line ML3 in the third horizontal direction connecting the third stage symbol of the reel 42M and the third stage symbol of the right reel 42R, and the "third stage symbol of the left reel 42L, the middle reel 42M The fourth main line ML4 in the upward direction connecting the two-stage design and the first-stage design of the right reel 42R, and the "fourth-stage design of the left reel 42L, the fourth-stage design of the middle reel 42M, right The fifth main line ML5 in the fourth horizontal direction connecting the “fourth stage symbol of the reel 42R”, “the fourth stage symbol of the left reel 42L, the third stage symbol of the middle reel 42M, and the right reel 42R” Eight combination lines of the sixth main line ML6 in the upward direction connecting the “two-stage symbols” can be formed. The main lines ML1 to ML6 can be set as effective lines, and the sublines SL1 and SL2 are not set as effective lines. Even in such a configuration, the combination line including the positions of the first stage and the third stage of the left reel 42L is set as an effective line, so that the same operational effects as those of the above embodiment can be obtained. .

  Needless to say, the sub lines SL1 and SL2 may be set as effective lines, and the third main line ML3 and the fourth main line ML4 may not be set as effective lines. Further, even when the display windows 31L, 31M, and 31R are configured so that five of each of the reels 42L, 42M, and 42R can be visually recognized, it is apparent that the same operational effects as those of the above-described embodiments can be obtained. It is.

  As shown in FIG. 69 (b), the number of symbols that can be visually recognized may be different for each reel. In FIG. 69 (b), display windows 31L, 31M, and 31R are configured such that five symbols on the left reel 42L, three symbols on the middle reel 42M, and three symbols on the right reel 42R are visible. An example is shown.

  In such a configuration, a right line connecting “the uppermost symbol of the left reel 42L, the upper symbol of the middle reel 42M, and the middle symbol of the right reel 42R” as a combination line that connects the positions where the symbols can be visually recognized in a straight line. A first main line ML2 in the lower right direction connecting the first main line ML1 in the lower direction and “the upper symbol in the left reel 42L, the middle symbol in the middle reel 42M, the lower symbol in the right reel 42R”, and “left A third main line ML3 in the upper horizontal direction connecting the upper symbol of the reel 42L, the upper symbol of the middle reel 42M, and the upper symbol of the right reel 42R, and the middle symbol of the middle reel 42M. Sub-line SL1 that connects the middle symbol of the right reel 42R, the lower symbol of the left reel 42L, the lower symbol of the middle reel 42M, the right reel The fourth main line ML4 in the lower horizontal direction connecting the "lower symbol of 42R" and the upwardly rightward direction connecting "the lower symbol of the left reel 42L, the intermediate symbol of the middle reel 42M, the upper symbol of the right reel 42R". Seven main lines ML5 and the sixth main line ML6 in the upward direction connecting the “lowermost symbol of the left reel 42L, the lower symbol of the middle reel 42M, and the middle symbol of the right reel 42R”. Combination lines can be formed. The main lines ML1 to ML6 can be set as effective lines, and the subline SL1 is not set as an effective line. Even in such a configuration, since the combination line including the upper and lower positions of the left reel 42L is set as an effective line, the same operational effects as those of the above embodiment can be obtained.

  In the configuration of the display window, the combination line including the upper stage of the left reel 42L and the combination line including the lower stage may not be set as effective lines. That is, the first main line ML1, the subline SL1, and the sixth main line ML6 are configured to be set as effective lines, and the other combination lines ML2 to ML5 are not set as effective lines.

  Further, the size of the display window may be set so that three symbols of the left reel 42L, one symbol of the middle reel 42M, and five symbols of the right reel 42R are visible.

  As described above, among the positions where the symbol of the left reel 42L becomes visible, at least one position is not set as an effective line, and the positions adjacent to the position not set as the effective line are the effective lines. If it is the structure which can be set as, there can exist an effect similar to said each embodiment. Therefore, the display window may be configured such that at least three symbols of the left reel 42L can be visually recognized, and the number of symbols that can be visually recognized by the other reels 42M and 42R is arbitrary.

  (24) In each of the above embodiments, the combination line including the middle position of the left reel 42L is not set as an effective line. However, the present invention is not limited to such a configuration, and the middle position of the middle reel 42M is not limited to this configuration. It is good also as a structure which does not set the including combination line as an effective line. However, in such a configuration, the combination lines that can be set as effective lines are limited to the upper line and the lower line. Needless to say, the combination line including the middle position of the right reel 42R may not be set as an effective line. In the configuration in which the display windows 31L, 31M, and 31R are set so that three symbols on each of the reels 42L, 42M, and 42R are visible, the combination line that includes the middle position of the left reel 42L is not set as an effective line This is because the same result is obtained.

  (25) In each of the above embodiments, a description has been given of a configuration in which when the “cherry” symbol of the left reel 42L is stopped on the active line, the cherry win is established regardless of the result of stopping the other reels 42M and 42R. It is not limited to such a configuration. For example, when the “cherry” symbol of the middle reel 42M is stopped on the active line, a cherry winning may be established regardless of the result of stopping the other reels 42M and 42R, or the “cherry” symbol of the right reel 42R. In the case where is stopped on the active line, a cherry winning may be established regardless of the result of stopping the other reels 42L and 42M.

  In addition, in the case of these configurations, if a combination line including the middle stage of a reel with a “cherry” symbol that is a cherry winning is not set as an effective line, the occurrence of a miss based on avoiding a composite winning is generated. Can be avoided, and the opportunity for the player to suffer disadvantages can be reduced.

  (26) In each of the above embodiments, the upper and lower stages of the left reel 42L are set as effective lines regardless of the number of medals bet. However, each position is set as an effective line according to the number of medals bet. It is good also as composition set up. For example, when a game is started with one medal bet, the second line ML2 is set as an active line, and when a game is started with two medals bet, the second line ML2 and the third line When the line ML3 is set as an effective line and three medals are bet, all the main lines ML1 to ML4 are set as effective lines.

  (27) In each of the above embodiments, the “cherry” symbol and the “replay” symbol are arranged so that the simultaneously visible section is formed. However, the present invention is not limited to this configuration, and the simultaneously visible section is formed. The symbol type of the combination symbol to be performed is arbitrary. Therefore, the “cherry” symbol and the “bell” symbol may be arranged so that the simultaneously visible section is formed, or the “cherry” symbol and the “watermelon” symbol may be arranged.

  (28) In each of the above embodiments, the slot machine 10 including the combination winning and the single winning as the winning mode has been described, but it goes without saying that the present invention may be applied to the slot machine 10 including only the winning combination as the winning mode. .

  (29) In each of the above embodiments, when it is impossible to stop the corresponding BB symbol combination on the active line under the BB winning situation, the symbol or symbol corresponding to any role on the subline SL1 Although the reach eyes where the combination stops are sometimes displayed, the reach eyes may not be displayed. Even in the case of such a configuration, by providing the subline SL1, it is possible to avoid the occurrence of missing due to the avoidance of composite winning.

  (30) In each of the above-described embodiments, a privilege for paying out medals is awarded when a small role winning is established. However, the present invention is not limited to this configuration, and some privilege is granted to the player. Any configuration may be used. For example, a configuration in which prizes other than medals are paid out when a small winning combination is established. In this configuration, for each determination value calculation information buffer B, information corresponding to a prize to be paid out is stored in the acquired number of bits. Further, in a slot machine that does not have an actual medal insertion or medal payout function and manages credits owned by a player, an increase in credited medals corresponds to provision of a privilege.

  (31) In each of the above embodiments, the medal payout is not performed when the “7” symbols as the state transition symbols are aligned on the active line. However, the medal payout may be performed.

  (32) In each of the above embodiments, a slot machine having three reels arranged in parallel has been described. However, the present invention is not limited to such a configuration. For example, the slot machine is provided with five reels arranged in parallel. Also good.

  (33) Although the so-called A type slot machine has been described in each of the above embodiments, B type, C type, A type and C type composite type, B type and C type composite type, and further CT game The present invention may be applied to any slot machine such as a provided type, and it is apparent that the same effects as those of the above-described embodiments can be obtained in any case. In addition, examples of bonus winning in each type include BB winning, RB winning, SB winning and the like.

  (34) The symbols of the reels 42L, 42M, and 42R are not limited to pictures, numbers, characters, and the like, but may be geometric lines or figures. In addition, the design can be configured by light, color, or the like, the design can be configured by a three-dimensional shape or the like, and the design can be configured by combining these. That is, it is sufficient that the symbol has a function as identification information (identification information).

  (35) In each of the above-described embodiments, an example in which the slot machine 10 is embodied has been described. However, the present invention may be applied to a gaming machine in which a slot machine and a pachinko machine are combined. That is, in the slot machine, instead of the medal insertion and medal payout functions, a gaming machine having a ball insertion and ball payout function such as a pachinko machine may be used. If such a gaming machine is used in place of a slot machine, only a ball can be handled as a gaming value in the gaming hall. Therefore, the gaming value seen in the current gaming hall in which pachinko machines and slot machines are mixed is used. Problems such as the burden on equipment due to the separate handling of medals and balls and restrictions on the location of the gaming machine can be solved.

  DESCRIPTION OF SYMBOLS 10 ... Slot machine as a gaming machine, 11 ... Housing which comprises a part of gaming machine body, 12 ... Front door which constitutes a part of gaming machine body or opening / closing member of gaming machine body, 14 ... Speaker, 15 ... Auxiliary display section 31... Display window 42. Fluctuation display means and reel as rotating cylinder or rotating body 61. Fluctuation display means and stepping motor as drive means 71 71 Start operation means Start lever, 72 to 74... Stop switch as stop operation means, 111... Display control device constituting output control means, 131... Main control device constituting start drive control means and stop drive control means, 151. CPUs constituting various control means such as control means, 152, 153... ROM, RAM as storage means, 161.

Claims (1)

A pattern display means having a plurality of circulation display means in which a plurality of types of patterns are cyclically displayed in a specific direction;
A display unit that enables visual recognition of the cyclic display of the pattern in each of the circulation display means;
Start operation means operated to start cyclic display of the pattern in each of the circulation display means;
Lottery means for performing a lottery of a role based on the operation of the start operation means;
Start control means for starting and controlling the picture display means so as to start circulation display in each circulation display means based on the operation of the start operation means;
A plurality of stop operation means operated to individually stop the circulation display in each of the circulation display means;
When the circulation display of the corresponding circulation display means is stopped based on the operation of each of the stop operation means, and when the winning operation lottery is won and the stop operation means is operated at a predetermined timing, A stop control means for stopping and controlling the design display means so that the winning design corresponding to the winning role stops at an effective position visible from the display unit;
A privilege granting means for granting a privilege as a winning establishment when the winning design stops at a valid combination at the effective position;
In a gaming machine equipped with
The stop control means includes
Correspondence relationship storage means for storing a correspondence relationship between a plurality of partition areas that circulate and display the circulation display information that is circularly displayed by each of the circulation display means, and a pattern set in each partition area;
Corresponding to the type of each pattern for which the corresponding relationship is stored in the corresponding relationship storing means in each of the circulation display means, the pattern used for determining whether or not the winning pattern forms the predetermined combination at the effective position. Pattern information storage means for storing information;
A reaching section area grasping means for grasping a reaching section area reaching a predetermined specified position among the respective partition areas of the corresponding circulation display means when the stop operation means is operated and a stop command is generated; ,
When the stop command is generated, stop partition area determination means for determining a stop partition area to be stopped at the specified position among the respective partition areas of the corresponding circulation display means based on the grasping result of the reaching partition area grasping means When,
The stop information for all the partition areas of the circulation display means as stop information used when stopping the circulation display of the circulation display means for which the stop partition area has not been determined, and the circulation display means for which the stop partition area has already been determined Stop information deriving means for deriving based on the determination result of the stop section area determining means;
Stop information storage means for storing the stop information for all the partitioned areas derived by the stop information deriving means;
With
The stop information deriving means includes
Reaching for each partition area constituting the all partition areas, based on information stored in the correspondence storage means, a reaching pattern that reaches the effective position when the partition area reaches the specified position A pattern grasping means;
Using the pattern information corresponding to the reaching pattern on the effective position for the cyclic display means for which the stop section area has already been determined, and the pattern information corresponding to the reaching pattern grasped by the reaching picture grasping means, the effective position Winning possibility determination means for determining whether or not the winning design forms the predetermined combination;
First avoidance determination for determining whether or not the reaching picture establishes a winning corresponding to a combination that is not won in the lottery of the combination using the pattern information corresponding to the reaching pattern grasped by the reaching pattern grasping means Means,
As the lottery result of the winning combination, the circulation display that is the target for deriving the stopping information in a situation where the winning combination is not won for the predetermined winning combination only when the stopping operation means is stopped at a predetermined timing. A second avoidance determination that determines whether or not a winning result of the predetermined combination is not established when each section area of the means reaches the specified position and a specific stop result corresponding to the winning of the predetermined combination is obtained. Means and
With
The stop information storage means includes at least
A winning possibility storage area for storing winning possibility information indicating a determination result of the winning possibility determination means;
As the first avoidance determination information indicating the determination result of the first avoidance determination means, the avoidance response indicating that the reached pattern corresponds to a combination that establishes a winning corresponding to the winning combination that has not been won in the winning combination. The first avoidance determination information, or the first avoidance determination information that is not an avoidance response indicating that the reached pattern does not correspond to a combination that establishes a winning corresponding to a winning combination that is not won in the winning combination. A first avoidance determination storage area that stores the
A second avoidance determination storage area for storing second avoidance determination information indicating a determination result of the second avoidance determination means;
Is provided,
The stop information deriving means is at least one in which the stop partition area is not determined from when a stop command that causes the two circulation display means to stop is generated as the stop command until the next stop command is generated. The circulation display means performs the grasping by the reaching picture grasping means, the determination by the winning possibility judging means, the judgment by the first avoidance judging means, and the judgment by the second avoidance judging means. Based on that, deriving stop information of all the partition areas,
The stop section area determining means is
When the stop command is issued to the circulation display means from which the stop information of all the partition areas is derived, the circulation display means is based on the grasp result of the reaching section area grasping means and the stop information. Of each partition area, determine a stop partition area to stop at the specified position,
and
Avoiding the partition area in which the first avoidance determination information corresponding to the avoidance is stored in the first avoidance determination storage area without stopping at the specified position;
As the lottery result of the combination, the second avoidance determination information indicating that the second avoidance determination unit determines that it corresponds to causing the specific stop result in a situation where the predetermined combination is not won. As for the partition area stored in the second avoidance determination storage area, the first avoidance determination information that is not the avoidance correspondence is the partition area that can be stopped at the specified position instead of the partition area. When there is a partition area stored in the first avoidance determination storage area, the first avoidance determination information not corresponding to the avoidance is stored in the first avoidance determination memory while avoiding without stopping at the specified position. When there is no partition area stored in the area, it is determined to stop at the specified position,
The stop information deriving means is for deriving the stop information during the stop control of the corresponding picture display means by the stop control means,
The stop control means controls the picture display means to stop so that a corresponding circulation display means stops until a predetermined specified period elapses after the stop command is generated,
The stop information derivation means is for ending the derivation of the stop information during the specified period,
A second stop for deriving stop information of all the divided areas for the prescribed circulation display means among the circulation display means from when each circulation display means starts circulation display until the first stop command is generated. A gaming machine comprising information deriving means.

Images